null null

iX Developer
Reference Manual
MAEN831L, 2015-02
English
Foreword
Reference manual for iX Developer
Foreword
The iX Developer software is used to configure iX panels and PC operated control
applications, including applications for IPCs (Industrial PCs).
The iX Developer makes it easy to create logical, flexible and effective HMI
applications that provide the right information on the right occasion to operators
and to other systems.
This manual describes the configuration software in detail.
Please see the iX Developer User’s Guide (MAEN832x) for function-based
descriptions.
The manual assumes that the most recent versions of the system program (image)
and iX Developer are used.
For specific details of a connected controller refer to the help file for the controller
driver. The function of a project application in an operator panel is not affected by
the choice of controller.
The information in this manual is also available by pressing F1 while using iX
Developer.
The present revision of this manual is valid for version 2.10 SP2 of iX Developer.
Order no: MAEN831L
Copyright © 2015-02 Beijer Electronics AB. All rights reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and is provided as available at the
time of printing. Beijer Electronics AB reserves the right to change any information without updating this
publication. Beijer Electronics AB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
All examples in this document are only intended to improve understanding of the functionality and handling
of the equipment. Beijer Electronics AB cannot assume any liability if these examples are used in real
applications.
In view of the wide range of applications for this software, users must acquire sufficient knowledge themselves
in order to ensure that it is correctly used in their specific application. Persons responsible for the application
and the equipment must themselves ensure that each application is in compliance with all relevant
requirements, standards, and legislation in respect to configuration and safety. Beijer Electronics AB will
accept no liability for any damage incurred during the installation or use of equipment mentioned in this
document. Beijer Electronics AB prohibits all modification, changes, or conversion of the equipment.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
Contents
1 The Configuration Tool ................................................ 11
1.1
Introduction ..................................................... 11
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.1.8
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
System Requirements and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Configured Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2 Working with Projects .................................................. 19
2.1
Creating a Project ................................................ 19
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.3
Importing an Information Designer Project ................... 22
Importing an H-Designer/ADP Project ........................ 23
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
Communication Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Communication Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Performance in the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Moving Objects with the Touch Screen ........................ 28
2.5.1
2.6
Exporting the H-Designer/ADP Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Importing the a2i File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optimizing Performance ........................................ 25
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.5
Connecting to a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Designing a Screen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Designing Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Operate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Peripherals ........................................................ 29
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3 Development Environment ............................................ 30
3.1
Starting iX Developer ............................................ 30
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.2
Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Getting Familiar with iX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Starting iX Developer from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Ribbon Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Additional Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Desktop Area ..................................................... 44
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Screen View in Desktop Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Desktop View Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Positioning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
3.2.4
3.3
Screens ............................................................ 54
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.4
Project Explorer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Component Library ............................................. 72
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
Screen Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Add Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Links in the Navigation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Navigation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Project Explorer .................................................. 67
3.6.1
3.7
Handling Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Navigation Manager ............................................. 65
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.6
Screen Name and Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Background Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Startup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Screen Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Screen Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Popup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Preloading Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Importing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Objects ........................................................... 61
3.4.1
3.5
Configuration Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Add and Use Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Component Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Property Grid .................................................... 79
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Toggling views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Copy Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.9
Object Browser ................................................... 81
3.10 Output ........................................................... 81
3.11 Error List ......................................................... 81
3.12 Help .............................................................. 81
4 Tags ....................................................................... 82
4.1
Adding Tags ...................................................... 82
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.2
4.3
4.4
Removing Unused Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Adding Tags during Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Selecting Multiple Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tag Actions ....................................................... 90
Internal Tags ..................................................... 90
System Tags ...................................................... 91
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
4.5
Array Tags ........................................................ 93
4.5.1
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
Cross Reference ..................................................
Triggers ...........................................................
Poll Groups .......................................................
Station Handling ................................................
Index Registers ...................................................
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.11
Index Addressing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Using Index Registers for Station Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Using Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Library Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Data Exchange ................................................... 105
Importing and Exporting Tags .................................. 109
4.13.1
4.13.2
4.13.3
4.13.4
4.14
4.15
4.16
94
94
95
96
97
Expressions ....................................................... 103
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.11.4
4.12
4.13
Array Tag Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Handling Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Saving the Import Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tag Import Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Importing Tags from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Filtering Tags ..................................................... 115
Tag Format ....................................................... 116
Aliases ............................................................. 117
4.16.1
4.16.2
Creating Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5 Controller ................................................................ 120
5.1
Adding a Controller ............................................. 120
5.1.1
5.2
5.3
DEMO Controller .............................................. 121
External OPC Server ............................................ 122
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
Notify Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
OPC Classic Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
OPC UA Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Updating Drivers ................................................ 124
5.4.1
5.4.2
Updating Drivers from Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Updating Drivers from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.5
Synchronizing the Controller Clock ............................ 126
6 Web Server ............................................................... 127
6.1
Web Server Configuration ...................................... 127
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
Javascript SDK ................................................... 128
6.2.1
6.3
Web Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Login Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Javascript SDK Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Web Service API ................................................. 138
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
RESTful Web Service API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
REST API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
7 Objects ................................................................... 142
7.1
Blinking Objects ................................................. 143
7.1.1
7.2
7.3
Shapes ............................................................ 144
HMI Controls ................................................... 144
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
7.3.10
7.3.11
7.3.12
7.3.13
7.3.14
7.3.15
7.3.16
7.3.17
7.3.18
7.3.19
7.3.20
7.4
Alarm Distributor Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Windows Controls ............................................... 175
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
7.7.5
7.7.6
7.7.7
7.8
Navigation List Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Screen Carousel Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Debug Tools ...................................................... 175
7.6.1
7.7
Media Player Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
PDF Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Web Browser Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Special Controls .................................................. 172
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
Action Menu Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Alarm Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Analog Numeric Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Animated GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Animated Label Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Audit Trail Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Button Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Circular Meter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Chart Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Database Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Digital Clock Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Linear Meter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Multi Picture Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Picture Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Roller Panel Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Slider Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Text Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Touch Combo Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Touch List Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Trend Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Media Controls .................................................. 168
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.5
Limitations for operator panel Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Check Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Combo Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Group Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
List Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Progress Bar Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Radio Button Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Text Box Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Additional Controls ............................................. 181
7.8.1
7.8.2
Target Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding Controls to the iX Developer Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
7.8.3
7.9
Default Controls and Installed Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
WPF Controls ................................................... 184
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.9.3
7.9.4
7.9.5
WPF User Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
WPF Custom Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Creating a WPF User Control with Tag Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Creating a Windows Forms User Control for a PC Target . . . . . . 187
Creating a Windows Forms User Control for a CE Target . . . . . . 190
8 Ribbon Tabs ............................................................. 193
8.1
Home Ribbon Tab ............................................... 193
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.1.8
8.2
Project Ribbon Tab .............................................. 205
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.3
Windows Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Dynamics Ribbon Tab ........................................... 231
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.7
8.8
Functions Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
View Ribbon Tab ................................................ 230
8.5.1
8.6
Date, Time, and Region Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Buzzer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Backlight Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Serial Ports Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Servers Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Output Devices Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Service Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Insert Ribbon Tab ................................................ 229
8.4.1
8.5
Run Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Transfer Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Project Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
System Ribbon Tab .............................................. 220
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.4
Clipboard Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Screen Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Objects Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Object Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Font Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Format Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Tag/Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Name Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Layout Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Color Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
General Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
General Ribbon Tab ............................................. 242
Actions Ribbon Tab .............................................. 242
8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3
8.8.4
8.8.5
8.8.6
8.8.7
Click Action Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Mouse Button Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Function Key Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Value Changed Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Focus Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Navigation Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Data Logger Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
8.8.8
8.8.9
8.8.10
8.8.11
Alarm Server Action Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Action Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Script Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Multiple Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9 Trend Viewer ............................................................ 252
9.1
Defining Trend Viewer Objects ................................. 252
9.1.1
9.1.2
Adding a Trend Viewer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Trend Viewer Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
9.2
Historical Mode in Trend Viewer ............................... 255
10 Data Logger .............................................................. 256
10.1 Data Logging Strategies ......................................... 256
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.2
Logging Based on Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Logging Based on Changed Tag Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Maximizing the Lifetime of the Storage Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Adding a Data Logger ........................................... 257
10.2.1
10.2.2
General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
11 Scheduler ................................................................ 260
11.1 Scheduler Set Up ................................................. 260
11.1.1
Adding a Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
12 Reports ................................................................... 261
12.1 Reports Template Set up ......................................... 261
12.1.1
12.1.2
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Database Driven Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.2 Reports Set Up ...................................................
12.3 Adding a Report ..................................................
13 Recipe Management ....................................................
13.1 Recipe Setup .....................................................
13.1.1
13.2
Loading Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Saving Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating Recipes in the iX panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Editing Recipes Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Recipe Export .................................................... 267
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.4
Adding a Recipe Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Recipes in the iX panel ........................................... 266
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.3
262
263
264
264
Recipe Export from an operator panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Recipe Export from a PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Recipe Import .................................................... 269
13.4.1
13.4.2
Recipe Import to an iX panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Recipe Import to a PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
14 Function Keys ........................................................... 272
14.1 Definitions ....................................................... 272
14.2 Configuring Function Keys ..................................... 272
14.2.1
14.2.2
Function Key Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Function Key Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
14.2.3
Momentary Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
15 Alarm Management ..................................................... 276
15.1 Alarm Conditions ................................................ 276
15.2 Alarm Server ...................................................... 276
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.3
15.4
Alarm Indicator .................................................. 280
Alarm Items ...................................................... 281
15.4.1
15.5
Actions and Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Remote Alarm Server ............................................ 285
15.7.1
15.7.2
15.7.3
15.8
Defining Alarm Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups ....... 284
15.6.1
15.6.2
15.7
Exporting and Importing Alarm Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Alarm Groups .................................................... 283
15.5.1
15.6
General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Alarm Server Events and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Alarm Distribution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Remote Alarm Server Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Remote Alarm Server Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Remote Alarm Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Alarm Distributor ................................................ 287
15.8.1
15.8.2
15.8.3
Alarm Distribution Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Adding an Alarm Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Configure Distribution Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
15.9 Alarm Distributor Viewer ....................................... 295
15.10 Alarm Viewer .................................................... 296
15.10.1
15.10.2
15.10.3
Buttons Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Display Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Alarm Viewer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
15.11 Alarm Management in Runtime ................................ 297
15.11.1
15.11.2
15.11.3
15.11.4
15.11.5
15.11.6
Alarm Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Play/Pause Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Info Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Modifying Alarm Distribution Settings in Runtime . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
16 Security Management ................................................... 300
16.1 General Security Settings ........................................ 300
16.1.1
16.2
Security Groups .................................................. 301
16.2.1
16.3
Password Rules Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating Security Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Users .............................................................. 302
16.3.1
Logging In and Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
16.4 Object Security and Visibility ................................... 303
17 Language Management ................................................. 305
17.1 Setting Up Multiple Languages ................................. 305
17.1.1
Adding Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Contents
17.2
17.3
17.4
System Texts ...................................................... 306
User Texts ......................................................... 307
Text ID ........................................................... 308
17.4.1
Text ID Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
17.5 Automatic Translation ...........................................
17.6 Exporting Languages ............................................
17.7 Importing Languages ............................................
18 Audit Trail ...............................................................
18.1 Logging Strategies ...............................................
18.2 Using the Audit Trail Function ..................................
18.2.1
18.3
18.4
311
313
314
316
316
316
Audit Trail Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Audit Trail Viewer ............................................... 318
Audit Trail Export ................................................ 318
18.4.1
18.4.2
Audit Trail Export from an iX panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Audit Trail Export from a PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
19 Text Library ..............................................................
19.1 Connecting Objects to Text Library Texts ......................
19.2 Exporting and Importing Text Library Texts ...................
20 Database Export .........................................................
20.1 Setting up Database Export .....................................
20.1.1
20.1.2
321
322
322
323
323
Database Export from operator panel Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Database Export from PC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
21 iX panel System Software ............................................... 326
21.1 Welcome Screen ................................................. 326
21.2 Service Menu ..................................................... 326
21.2.1
21.2.2
21.2.3
21.3
Service Menu in an Empty Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Service Menu in iX TxA/iX TxB Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Service Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
iX panel Upgrade ................................................. 328
21.3.1
21.3.2
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Transfer Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
22 Multiple Controllers .................................................... 330
22.1 Adding a Controller ............................................. 330
22.1.1
22.1.2
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
23 Troubleshooting .........................................................
23.1 Project Build Failure .............................................
23.2 Backup Project Issues ............................................
23.3 Invalid Names ....................................................
23.4 Adobe Reader not Recognized ..................................
23.5 Expression Cannot Be Found ...................................
23.6 Performance Issue Related to Graphics Card ...................
23.7 Error Related to Third Party Controls ..........................
23.8 Performance Issue When Navigating in Script Tree View ....
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
333
333
333
333
333
333
334
334
334
The Configuration Tool
1
The Configuration Tool
1.1
Introduction
The iX Developer software is used to configure operator panels and PC operated
control applications, including applications for IPCs (Industrial PCs) from
Beijer Electronics.
iX Developer contains all basic functions needed in an application. The functions
are tested and developed with customer needs and preferences in focus.
Pre-defined objects in iX Developer can be used to create complete process
images, providing an overview of a complex application. You can customize the
pre-defined objects or create objects of your own.
Communication drivers for a large number of controllers and automation
equipment are available.
The help file assumes that the most recent versions of the system program (image)
and iX Developer are used.
1.1.1
Controller
iX panel operator panels can be connected to many types of automation
equipment, such as PLCs, servos, and drives. Further on, the expression controller
is used as a general term for the connected equipment.
Related information
Controller
1.1.2
Tags
Data values in a controller are referred to as tags.
Tags may also belong to the system or be internal. A tag has a symbolic name and
can be of different data types.
Objects connected to tags can change values in the controller, and tag values can be
reflected by changing object appearance in various ways. Objects in a screen will
remain static until connected to a tag.
Related information
Tags
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
11
The Configuration Tool
1.1.3
System Requirements and
Limitations
iX Developer
iX Developer System Requirements
Parameter
Recommendation
RAM
2 GB
Processor
2 GHz or higher
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows XP SP3 1
Graphics card
Tier 2:
DirectX version: 9.0 or higher
Video RAM: 120MB or higher
Pixel shader: version level 2.0 or higher
Vertex shader: version level 2.0 or higher
Multitexture units: 4 or more
(1)From 2014 Microsoft does no longer support Windows XP. This might result in limited
support in iX Developer.
Note:
It is recommended to always install the latest .NET Framework update.
Updates
Software, drivers and protocols may have been updated since the USB stick was
produced. Therefore, it is recommended that you use the built-in update function
in iX Developer before creating a project.
Related information
Update Software
Updating Drivers
iX Runtime
iX Runtime System Requirements
Parameter
Recommendation
RAM
1 GB
Processor
1.3 GHz or higher
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
12
The Configuration Tool
iX Runtime System Requirements
Parameter
Recommendation
Operating system
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows XP SP3 1
Graphics card
Tier 2:
DirectX version: 9.0 or higher
Video RAM: 120MB or higher
Pixel shader: version level 2.0 or higher
Vertex shader: version level 2.0 or higher
Multitexture units: 4 or more
(1)From 2014 Microsoft does no longer support Windows XP. This might result in limited
support in iX Runtime.
Updating iX Runtime in an operator panel
iX Runtime is pre-loaded in every operator panel on delivery. If necessary, this
could be upgraded to a newer version using the Image Loader application.
Related information
iX panel System Software
Special Requirements for Some Objects
For some objects to be included in the iX Developer project, specific software
versions are required. Simulation of the project on the development PC may also
be limited for some targets.
Object
Minimum
requirement
Windows Media
Player 10
Simulation on PC
target
Supported
Simulation on panel
target
Not supported
PDF Viewer
Acrobat Reader 9
Supported
Not supported
Web Browser
Microsoft Internet
Explorer 7
Supported
Not supported
Media Player
1.1.4
Getting Started
iX Developer is installed on a development PC, where projects are developed,
designed and compiled. The project is then run in an operator panel or PC to
observe and control a controller (or a group of controllers).
Target
iX Developer projects can be targeted for
•
An operator panel from Beijer Electronics
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
13
The Configuration Tool
•
•
A PC (Industrial PC) from Beijer Electronics
A standard PC with Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 3, Microsoft
Windows Vista or Microsoft Windows 7
Note:
From 2014 Microsoft does no longer support Windows XP. This might result in limited
support in iX Developer.
To enhance readability, only operator panel will be mentioned sometimes, when
all different targets actually could be included.
The functions in iX Developer depend on the model of operator panel used.
Some differences exist between the targets, for example:
Item
Support on PC target
Support on operator
panel target
Media Player
Supported
PDF Viewer
Supported
Web Browser
Supported
Navigation List Box
Supported
Screen Carousel
Supported
Drop down shadow
effect
Supported
Rounded corners on
rectangle
Supported
Opacity
Supported
Report
Supported
Reports containing charts and
pictures can not be printed
from an operator panel target
Dynamics
All dynamic settings are
supported
Some dynamic settings are
not supported on TA / iX
TxA / iX TxB panels, e.g.
background color for button,
trend viewer and meter, and
min/max values for meter
Not supported on iX TxA
panels
Not supported on Q-Term, TA
/ iX TxA / iX TxB panels
License
A project for an operator panel can be used without any restrictions imposed by
licensing.
A limited number of controller tags are available for a standard PC project. The
number of tags is controlled by a USB hardware dongle.
The PCs from Beijer Electronics are configured with a fixed limit of tags, and do
not require a USB dongle.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
14
The Configuration Tool
The number of used controller tags (including DEMO controller tags) is shown
in the lower right of the desktop. The figures will turn red if the number of used
tags becomes greater than the number of available tags.
There are no license restrictions for internal tags.
Related information
Internal Tags
DEMO Controller
Product Registration
The first time iX Developer is started, a registration dialog is displayed. Entering
the registration key provides unlimited access to all program functionality and
software updates.
Alternatively, select to continue using a trial version of the software. You may
evaluate iX Developer with full functionality for 30 days. When the evaluation
period has expired, it will still be possible to use the software, but the functions in
the Run and Transfer groups will be disabled.
Note:
If you have already used a Demo version of iX Developer for 30 days, you will not be
issued another 30 days for evaluation.
Project Size
The project size is shown in the lower right of the desktop area when designing an
operator panel project. The size was calculated at the latest validation.
1.1.5
Installation
The iX Developer software is supplied on a USB stick. When connecting the USB
stick to the USB port, the installation starts automatically. Follow the instructions
to install iX Developer. If the installation does not start, run the setup.exe file.
The installation creates an icon for iX Developer in the group named iX
Developer.
Click on Start/All Programs/iX Developer 2.10/iX Developer 2.10 to start iX
Developer.
Note:
The iX Developer must be installed on a development PC, a iX TxC target can not be
used to develop projects.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
15
The Configuration Tool
Installation of iX Runtime
To install iX Runtime on a PC, insert the iX Developer USB stick and select to
install iX Runtime. To run the program, a dongle is required that is supplied by
Beijer Electronics.
Note:
iX Developer can not be run on the same PC as iX Runtime.
Note:
When using iX Runtime on a PC it is recommended to uninstall a previous iX Runtime
before installing a new version.
1.1.6
Configured Features
iX Developer offers the possibility to add customer-specific features in the
program. This is done through the use of registration keys that are entered after
the iX Developer software installation has been done.
Clicking on Show Features displays a list of enabled features. To install a new
feature, enter the feature registration key under Configured Features and click
OK. A restart of the program is required to activate the function.
Related information
About
1.1.7
Project
The top folder for a specific application designed with iX Developer is referred
to as the project folder.
During runtime, project database files can be updated, for example with new
recipes. This means that to completely reproduce a project that has been in
operation, it may be necessary to combine source files with files retrieved from
the operator panel.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
16
The Configuration Tool
1.1.8
File Structure
A project contains a set of files related to the functional and graphical design and
a set of files related to the runtime operation of the project, where the latter is
compiled from the design files.
Project Folder
When a new project is created, a folder with the project name is created as the
top-level container, the Project folder. The files that define the functional and
graphical design reside in the top level of the project folder. Other folders are
created as a result of validation and build.
Symbols
Pictures that are used in projects are converted to .png files when the project is
validated.
Pictures are resized to the largest static usage in any of the project screens, in
order to save memory space in the panel. If a picture is enlarged in runtime using
dynamics, the enlarged picture will have a lower effective resolution.
Project pictures are stored in the Symbols folder as a compressed folder named
Symbols.zip.
Temp
The Temp folder contains intermediate build files from project compilation.
The Temp folder also includes the Output folder. The Output folder contains all
files needed to run the project in the target. These files are copied to an operator
panel when the Transfer command is used. For a PC, the Transfer to folder
command is used to copy the necessary files to a USB stick to the runtime PC via
a network connection.
Note:
It is necessary to open ports in the firewall for the runtime PC application.
Moving Design Files
To move the project files needed for the design:
1. Create a new folder for the project design files.
2. Copy all single files (files not included in any folders) as well as all folders,
except the Temp folder, in the project folder.
3. Paste the files in the new folder.
Moving Application Project
The runtime project can be downloaded to the operator panel using the transfer or
export commands, but can also be moved manually:
1. Create the new folder for the project files.
2. Copy the Output folder.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
17
The Configuration Tool
3. Paste it in the new folder.
Database
The database used for iX Developer projects is of SQL Server Compact Edition
type. The contents of the database can be managed with third-party database
management tools. iX Developer includes a database viewer object that can be
used to display database contents in runtime.
The database is initially transferred to the operator panel using the transfer
command. The database will only be updated if there are changes made in the
project that affects the database contents, for example:
•
Changed or added recipes
•
Changed or added data loggers
•
Changes to alarm handling
•
Changed or added trend viewers
A copy of the database can be made with the Upload Database command. Some
of the databases can be exported individually in csv, comma separated values,
format using the Database Export action. If possible, it is recommended to use the
database export action rather than the backup database action.
Related information
Database Viewer Object
Download
Export
Upload Database
Database Export
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
18
Working with Projects
2
Working with Projects
This section describes iX Developer and explains how to work with a project for
an operator panel.
In iX Developer, ribbon tabs are used instead of menu commands. This reduces
the number of steps needed to design complex components, and also supplies an
attractive user interface.
Ribbon tabs are located in the top section of the tool window. Each ribbon tab
holds one or several control groups. Each group contains a set of related controls.
Controls are made to design screens, and to make settings for objects and controls
in the project.
2.1
Creating a Project
A project can be created according to the following sections, but the work process
can be adapted and rearranged if needed.
2.1.1
Connecting to a Controller
Establishing communication between an operator panel and controller is
necessary to allow operator observation and control. The larger the project is, the
more important it is to ensure that there is a suitable communication design.
There is a built-in DEMO controller in iX Developer. It can be used for test and
simulation purposes.
Related information
Creating a New Project
Select Controller
Communication Design
DEMO Controller
2.1.2
Designing a Screen Set
It is important to organize the application well and to consider which functions are
necessary. Start with an overall view and then work down to a detailed level.
A project contains a number of screens with objects that can exchange data with
the controller. Screens can be arranged in hierarchies to achieve a structured
application, or organized as sequence controls. When deciding which structure
to use, consider how to best describe the process at hand and how to simplify
procedures for the machine operator.
The complete application, or parts of it, can be tested in the development
environment before downloading it to the operator panel.
Related information
Screens
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
19
Working with Projects
2.1.3
Designing Additional Functions
Alarms
Alarms are used to make the operator aware of events that require immediate
action. An alarm is set when a certain condition is met. An alarm condition is
designed as a logical evaluation of a tag value. Alarms can be divided into groups
to create an order of priority.
Related information
Alarm Management
Function Keys
Function keys can be used to perform actions and execute scripts. This allows
operator control of data and screen functionality independent of which screen
is active.
Related information
Function Keys
Multiple Languages
Translation of texts and system texts can be performed directly in the application,
or via export to a text file to be translated in other software. The file is imported
to the application after translation. The application language can be changed in
runtime, for example based on a tag value.
Note:
Pre-translated system texts are provided with iX Developer. These texts are adapted
for a PC, which means that they contain more strings than what is available for panel
targets. This results in warnings when importing the system texts to projects created
for a panel, but these warnings can safely be ignored.
Related information
Language Management
Security
Access to objects and actions in the project can be limited using security groups
and user passwords.
Related information
Security Management
Text Library
With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked
to texts.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
20
Working with Projects
Related information
Text Library
Audit Trail
The Audit Trail function allows tracking of operator actions.
Related information
Audit Trail
Data Logger
Data can be logged and saved to file. Bit, 16-bit, 32-bit and Real (Float) values can
be logged. Be aware that logging of data consumes system resources and memory.
Related information
Data Logger
Scheduler
Setting and resetting digital tags in relation to the real-time clock can be performed
using a scheduler, in order to control events in the process at special calendar times.
Related information
Scheduler
Recipes
Recipes are used to set or save a predefined group of tags in one operation.
Values can be predefined or collected from the controller, and then saved to a
recipe in the operator panel. The operator can download the recipe at any time to
the controller, which will start working with the recipe values. Recipe handling
makes it possible to reuse large parameter sets, to improve efficiency of time critical
production where a change of products must be made quickly. Recipe files can be
created in the development project or with the operator panel.
Related information
Recipe Management
Reports
The reports function allows adding excel report templates to the project.
Related information
Reports
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
21
Working with Projects
2.2
Importing an Information Designer
Project
Existing Information Designer projects can be imported to iX Developer.
Information Designer is the previous software used to design projects for the
EXTER operator panels.
The import function is accessed from the Welcome page, displayed when starting
iX Developer.
1. Select the Information Designer project file.
2. Select a name and location for the imported project.
3. Click Finish.
The project will be imported to the corresponding iX panel target. All screens
will be imported and graphical objects in the Information Designer project will
be converted to corresponding iX Developer objects. Some objects may not be
supported.
Functions such as recipes and data logging work differently in iX Developer, and
will have to be reconfigured in the imported project.
During the import, a log file of unsupported objects and functions is created. It
can be saved to disk for future reference.
Note:
If there is a crash when importing an Information Designer project, the problem could
be solved by installing a hotfix from http:/ /support.microsoft.com/kb/2461678.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
22
Working with Projects
2.3
Importing an H-Designer/ADP
Project
Existing H-Designer/ADP projects can be imported to iX Developer.
H-Designer/ADP is the previous software used to design projects for the
H-/PWS-series operator panels.
The following software versions are required:
Software
Version
ADP
6.50 build 184
iX Developer
2.0 or higher
2.3.1
Exporting the H-Designer/ADP
Project
First, the H-Designer/ADP project has to be converted to an a2i file from within
ADP by following the steps below:
1. Select File/Export iX.
2. Select a name and location for the export file, and click OK.
A message box confirms that the export is finished, and after clicking OK, you
are asked if you want to see the log file. The log file is saved to the same location
as the project file.
The log file declares successfully converted items as well as unsupported
objects and functions.
2.3.2
Importing the a2i File
Then, the exported file is imported into iX Developer using the import function
that is accessed from the Welcome page, displayed when starting iX Developer.
1. Select the a2i file.
2. Select a name and location for the imported project.
3. Click Finish.
The project will be imported to the corresponding iX panel target. All screens
will be imported and graphical objects in the H-Designer/ADP project will be
converted to corresponding iX Developer objects. Some objects and functions
may not be supported at all, and some objects and functions need reconfiguring in
the imported project.
During the import, a log file of unsupported objects and functions is created. It
can be saved to disk for future reference.
2.3.3
Limitations
All parts of the original H-Designer/ADP project will not be fully supported in iX
Developer. For example, for objects that use individual controller registers for read
and write, only the register selected for write will be connected. Also, patterns and
other decoration of objects may not be included in the imported project.
The following functions and objects will not be converted, or will need
reconfiguration:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
23
Working with Projects
Function
Controller
Comment
Import of name list and addresses for the
first two controllers in the ADP project is
supported.
Import of controller settings such as IP address
and COM settings is not supported.
Import of index registers is not supported.
Macro and sub-macro
Not supported
Recipes
Not supported
Object
Comment
Action push button
The graphical control will be imported but the
actions need to be reconfigured.
Alarm history table, active alarm
list, alarm frequency table and
alarm marquee
Not supported
Animated graphic
Not supported
Bar graph deviation
The graphical control will be imported but
needs to be reconfigured.
Day of week display
The graphical control will be imported but
needs to be reconfigured.
Dynamic ellipse and dynamic
rectangle
Not supported
Historical data table and historical
event table
Not supported
Moving sign
Not supported
Multistate indicator
Not supported
Pie graph
Not supported
Set value push button
Not supported
Seven segments
Not supported
Trend graph
The graphical control will be imported but the
curves need to be reconfigured.
X-Y chart
Not supported
Shape
Comment
Arc
Not supported
Free form
Not supported
Parallelogram and solid
parallelogram
Not supported
Pie and solid pie
Not supported
Scale
Not supported
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
24
Working with Projects
Shape
Comment
Shape
Not supported
Solid polygon
The graphical control will be imported but
needs to be reconfigured.
2.4
Optimizing Performance
The following section presents a couple of issues to consider in order to optimize
the iX Developer project. Some parts are related to the communication driver;
other parts concern CPU load and flash operations.
2.4.1
Communication Performance
Signal Types
Tags used for driver communication can be static or dynamic. These are updated
in different manners.
Static Tags
Static tags are updated continuously, even if they are not currently shown on the
panel display.
Additionally, the operator panel reads the following items continuously:
•
Alarm tags
•
Data logger tags
•
Multiple languages tags
•
Controller tags with value change events
The communication time is not affected by the following:
•
Alarm messages
•
Schedulers
•
Tags linked to function keys
Dynamic Tags
Dynamic tags are updated only when they are presented on the display. An analog
numeric object serves as an example of when a dynamic tag is used.
2.4.2
Communication Design
This section describes how tags are read and how the reading can be optimized to
make the communication between the operator panel and the controller fast and
efficient.
Keeping Tags in Consecutive Order
Define controller tags consecutively, for example M0.0-M11.7. If the tags are
spread (e.g. I0.4, Q30.0, M45.3 etc.) a complete update will take longer time.
The number of tags in each package depends on the used driver and information
about this can be found in the driver help file.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
25
Working with Projects
Tag Packages
Tags to be transferred are not all transferred at the same time, but are grouped
into packages. The number of tags in each package depends on the driver for the
controller.
To make communication as fast as possible the number of packages should be
minimized. Consecutive tags require a minimum number of packages, but it is
perhaps not always possible to program it this way. In such cases there is a “waste”
between two tags.
Waste is the maximum distance between two tags that can be kept in the same
package. The size of the waste depends on the driver used, and is included in the
driver help file, e.g as in the table below:
Driver x
Analog signals
Digital signals
Number of signals/package
29
124
Waste
20
0
Bit-Addressed Words vs. Regular Bit Devices
In most drivers it is better to use bit-addressed words than regular bit devices, since
you can fit more digital devices in one telegram when using bit-addressed words,
than when using bit devices.
Example
Driver x
Analog signals
Digital signals
Number of signals/package
29
124
Waste
20
0
This specific driver can have 29 analog devices or 124 digital devices in one
telegram. If you use bit-addressed words in the selected driver, you can fit 464
(29 × 16) digital devices in one package. This is almost four times as many devices.
ASCII Strings
ASCII strings are transmitted in separate telegrams, and having a large number
of strings will affect the communication performance negatively. If an ASCII
string only has a small number of different string values, it may be a good idea to
use the Text Library function in iX Developer with predetermined contents, thus
minimizing impact on driver performance.
Related information
Text Library
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
26
Working with Projects
2.4.3
Performance in the operator panel
It is important to understand that due to the complex nature of a running system,
there are several things that affects the overall performance. The following list
gives some examples of things to consider, when it is necessary improve the
performance of the operator panel:
•
Number of tags
•
Number of sampled tags in trend viewers and data logger
•
Number of alarms
•
Driver performance
•
Multiple drivers
•
Type of panel
•
Alarm list size
•
Size of pictures
•
Scripts
Poll Groups
The default setting in iX Developer updates all tags every 500 ms. If some tags
may be updated less often, it is possible to assign them to a poll group with a lower
update interval. Poll groups are configured in the Tags configuration page.
Screens
Optimizing screen update time minimizes CPU load and flash operations. This
can make a significant difference in graphic-intense projects that approach the
limits of the panel’s capabilities.
Screen changes are carried out most efficiently through a show screen action, either
on a function key or an object.
Trend Viewers and Data Loggers
Several trend viewers can show data from the same log item.
In order to improve performance in the panel, it is strongly recommended to place
all log items logged on the same frequency/event in the same data logger or at least
reduce the amount of data loggers.
Try to avoid having one data logger for each trend viewer.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
27
Working with Projects
Gradients
Using objects with gradients creates a slightly higher load on the CPU. If a large
number of objects use gradients, this will make the screen update time significantly
slower. Pay special attention to objects with gradients that are updated frequently,
e.g. a bar graph with a style with gradients connected to a tag that changes at short
intervals.
Reports
Using the reports function in a project will result in an increased panel startup
time.
Related information
Action Groups
Trend Viewer
Reports
Data Logging Strategies
Symbols
2.5
Moving Objects with the Touch
Screen
iX panels with touch screens do not have a built-in keyboard. All maneuvering
is done with the touch screen by pressing distinctly with a finger. Because of the
resistive touch technology, the screen can only apprehend pressing on one place on
the panel at the time. Pressing two points at the same time is interpreted by the
panel as a point midway between the two pressed points.
Related information
2.5.1
Operate Objects
For an object to react, it is necessary to specify the behavior, typically by assigning
a tag and defining an action. All objects can have actions linked to mouse down,
mouse up, mouse enter and mouse leave events. Some objects have a predefined
behavior, like sliders setting values, but can also have actions linked to mouse
down and mouse up events.
Button
Pressing a button triggers a click- and mouse button event.
Text Box
Pressing on a text box object displays a virtual alpha-numeric keyboard on the
panel screen. Type a text using this keyboard and finish by pressing [ENTER].
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
28
Working with Projects
Analog Numeric
Pressing on an analog numeric object displays a virtual keyboard on the panel
screen. The keyboard type depends on the format chosen for the Analog Numeric
— String, Integer, Decimal, Hex or Binary. Enter a value using this keyboard and
finish by pressing [ENTER].
In runtime a validation of the value is done. If the value entered is out of bounds,
the corresponding limit value for the object will be shown.
Slider
Pressing on the desired value position of a slider object sets it to the pressed
position.
Related information
Actions Ribbon Tab
Mouse Button Action Triggers
Click Action Trigger
Virtual Keyboard
Validation Group
2.6
Peripherals
2.6.1
USB
External devices such as a USB hub, flash drive, mouse, or keyboard can be
connected to the USB host port.
2.6.2
Ethernet
The operator panel has built-in Ethernet port(s) for connection to controllers via
TCP/IP. The number of ports varies by model.
Related information
IP Settings
2.6.3
Memory Card
An external memory card can be used as storage of e.g. pdf files and media files, to
reduce used internal memory. Access to the files on the external memory card is
available via scripting.
Related information
Project Group
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
29
Development Environment
3
Development Environment
This section describes how to work with iX Developer.
Clicking the Options button in the File menu allows adapting the tool behavior.
Related information
File Menu
Options
3.1
Starting iX Developer
Click on Start/All Programs/iX Developer 2.10/iX Developer 2.10 to start iX
Developer.
iX Developer can also be started from the command line.
When iX Developer is started, it is possible to:
•
Create a new project using a wizard
•
Open an existing project - a list of recently opened projects is displayed
•
Open a sample project
•
Upload a project from a target
•
Import a project created in Information Designer
•
View the User’s Guide, based on an example project that serves as an
instructive introduction to iX Developer
Projects can also be created or opened later from the File menu.
Related information
Creating a New Project
Importing an Information Designer Project
Starting iX Developer from the Command Line
Upload from Target
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
30
Development Environment
3.1.1
Creating a New Project
To create a new project using the wizard includes the following steps:
1. Start iX Developer.
2. Select to create a new project.
3. Select target for the project.
4. Select controller brand and model.
5. Name the project and define where files are to be saved in the PC environment.
Select operator panel
Select the appropriate target from the presented set of operator panel/PC.
The target can be changed later, from the Settings group on the Project ribbon tab.
When working with a project for panel T7A, T10A or iX TxB, it is possible to
select the rotation of the panel from a drop-down list.
When working with a project for a standard PC, it is possible to select resolution
from a drop-down list. The PC resolution can be changed later, by entering the
Settings group on the Project ribbon tab.
Related information
Changing Project Target
Select Controller
Select the appropriate controller for the project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
31
Development Environment
The demo controller, including regular tags (data containers) and counters, is used
to design and test a project directly on the development PC without connection to
an external controller.
Internal tags that work like controller tags, but are independent of an external
controller, can be defined.
It is also possible to connect to an external OPC server.
The controller can be changed later by clicking the Controller button on the
Controllers tab of the tags configuration page.
A project can connect to more than one controller. To set up multiple controllers:
Related information
Controller
DEMO Controller
Internal Tags
External OPC Server
Multiple Controllers
Select Location
The Select Location dialog controls naming of the project and where project files
are saved in the computer environment.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
32
Development Environment
1. Change the project name, if desired.
2. Select where to store the project files by clicking Browse, or accept the
suggested location.
3. Click Finish to create the new project.
3.1.2
Opening a Project
To open an existing project using the wizard includes the following steps:
1. Start iX Developer.
2. Select to open a project.
3. Browse to the project file in the appearing “open project” dialog.
Note:
It is possible to open a compressed ZIP file of the iX Developer project. The user will be
prompted for a path where the ZIP file can be decompressed.
Related information
Compress Project
Download
3.1.3
Getting Familiar with iX Developer
The ribbon tabs (e.g. Home, System and Insert) are located in the top of the
window when iX Developer is started. The control groups (e.g. Clipboard,
Screen, Objects on the Home ribbon tab) are available in the ribbon area.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
33
Development Environment
The Project Explorer contains a folder area, and is managed as a docked window.
The desktop area is where screens are drawn and where tags and functions are
handled.
Configuration of objects on a screen is mainly performed using the controls in
the Home and General tabs. Selecting an object on the screen displays the Home
ribbon tab; double-clicking displays the General tab, except for the Button object,
for which the Actions tab is displayed instead. Several common commands are
also available by right-clicking on an object in a screen.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
34
Development Environment
Related information
Project Explorer
Positioning Windows
Screens
Tags
Keyboard Navigation
Pressing Alt on the keyboard displays which keyboard shortcut commands can be
used to execute a command or to enter a control group, e.g. Alt + F opens the File
menu, and Alt + I displays the Insert ribbon tab control groups.
Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Key Commands
The list below includes some of the keyboard shortcuts and function key
commands that are available in iX Developer:
Keyboard shortcut /
function key
Ctrl + P,
[number of the
screen]
Description
Switch between screens according to their order on the
desktop
Ctrl + E, L
Lock selected elements on active screen (E indicates active
editor)
Ctrl + E, H
Hide selected elements on active screen (E indicates active
editor)
Ctrl + Z
Undo
Ctrl + Y
Redo
Ctrl + A
Select all
Ctrl + X
Cut
Ctrl + C
Copy
Ctrl + V
Paste
Ctrl + N
New project
Ctrl + O
Open project
Ctrl + S
Save project
Ctrl + B
Bold style
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
35
Development Environment
Keyboard shortcut /
function key
Description
Ctrl + I
Italic style
Ctrl + U
Underline
F1
Display help file. Pressing F1 from within the Script Editor
displays scripting help.
F5
Validate project
F6
Run
3.1.4
Starting iX Developer from the
Command Line
iX Developer can also be started from the command line, by entering:
"[Path to the NeoIDE.exe file]" "[Project location]\[Project name].neoproj"
Example
To start iX Developer, and open the project named Test1 in the directory
C:\MyProjects, select Run from Windows start menu, and type:
• "C:\Program Files (x86)\Beijer Electronics AB\iX Developer 2\Bin\NeoIDE.exe"
"C:\MyProjects\Test1\Test1.neoproj"
3.1.5
File Menu
The File menu contains commands for creating, opening, closing saving and
compressing projects. It also offers the possibility to upload a project from a target
and to update drivers and iX Developer software via Internet or from file. The File
menu is accessed by clicking on the top left button.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
36
Development Environment
New
When you start iX Developer and select to create a new project, a wizard guides
you through the creation of a new project, in the same way as having selected
Create New Project from the Welcome page.
Related information
Creating a New Project
Open
Selecting Open displays a dialog that allows selection of an existing project file
by browsing.
Save
Selecting Save saves the project to the current project folder.
Save As
Selecting Save As allows saving the project with a different name and/or in a
different location.
To ensure that the original project remains unchanged, the new project file must
be created with the Save As command before modifying its contents.
Creating a new folder when using the Save as command helps keeping the large
number of project files neatly collected and easy to overview.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
37
Development Environment
Note:
Selecting Save as cannot be used in order to make modifications of an existing project,
keeping the original project unchanged, and saving the new version with another
name. Changes will affect the original project anyway. It is recommended to make a
backup copy of the original project, for example by using Windows Explorer, prior to
modifying it.
Compress Project
Selecting Compress Project compresses the project and saves it as a ZIP file. The
user will be prompted for a path where to save the ZIP file and will also be offered
the possibility to password protect the ZIP file.
Related information
Compress Project
Upload from Target
Selecting Upload from Target allows uploading a compressed ZIP file of a project
from a connected target.
Note:
To be able to use the “Upload from target” function, the checkbox “Download all
source code” on the “Download” dialog must have been clicked before downloading
the project to an operator panel. See the “Download” chapter for more information.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
38
Development Environment
Parameter
Description
Connected targets
Choose the target type to transfer the project from.
Upload
Starts the transfer of the ZIP file from the selected target.
The user will be prompted for a path where to decompress
the ZIP file. If the ZIP file is password protected, the
user must enter the password to be able to upload and
decompress the ZIP file.
Upload is supported for iX TxA, iX TxB, iX TxC and PC
targets. If greyed out, please update to latest “System
program”.
Verify
The verify function enables the user to check if a target
platform configuration is identical to the project
configuration.
Verify is supported for iX TxA, iX TxB, iX TxC and PC
targets. If greyed out, please update to latest “System
program”.
Log
Show the data being logged during the upload and verify
process.
Related information
Download
iX panel Upgrade
Close Project
Selecting Close Project closes the current project and activates the start wizard.
Update Software
The latest updates and patches for iX Developer can be downloaded directly via
an Internet connection.
Update Drivers
Drivers can be updated via Internet or from file.
Related information
Updating Drivers
About
Clicking the About button displays information about the current version of iX
Developer including the product registration key.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
39
Development Environment
Note:
The active project needs to be saved in order to access the list of features.
Note:
If an iX Developer version 2.0 based feature has previously been installed, the
registration key will automatically be converted when upgrading to iX Developer
version 2.10.
Options
Clicking the Options button allows making settings that control the behavior and
appearance of iX Developer.
Language Options
Select in which language to run iX Developer. A restart of the application is
required for the new language selection to have an effect.
Build Options
Select whether the CheckForUnusedTags function should be activated or not.
When building a project, the function checks for unused tags and presents a dialog
in which it is possible to remove these.
Related information
Removing Unused Tags
Script Debugger Options
•
•
•
Arguments: The “%1” argument is where the file name will be inserted. This
option is applicable only when Custom is selected for DebuggerType.
Debugger: Full path to the current debugger application.
DebuggerType: Select Default or Custom. With the Default setting, the
system will automatically provide the path to the debugger, if found. Custom
allows the user to provide the path to a specific debugger.
Tags Editor Options
Selections under Tags Editor Options makes it possible to customize which
columns to show by default in the tags configuration window.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
40
Development Environment
Ribbon Options
•
•
GoToDefaultRibbonStrategy: This option changes the active ribbon based
on the context of the selection in the desktop. When an object is created or
selected, the General tab tabs becomes active in the ribbon area.
SimpleRibbonStrategy: This is the default setting, and does not swap the
active ribbon when the context of the current desktop selection changes.
Clicking on an object opens the Home ribbon, and double-clicking opens
the General ribbon for most objects, but for buttons the Actions ribbon is
activated.
Screen Editor Options
•
•
•
•
EnableInPlaceEditing: This option allows editing an object directly when
selecting it on the screen without having to access its properties on e.g. the
General ribbon tab.
ShowPanelAround: This option displays an outline of the selected panel
model around the desktop area.
ShowSizeAndDistanceInformation: The size of an object is displayed while
resizing it. Distance to the edges of the desktop area is displayed when moving
an object. The indication can be turned off, if desired, by setting this option
to False.
ShowToolTips: Useful tool tips are automatically displayed in iX Developer.
These can be turned off, if desired, by setting this option to False.
The screen editor options can also be modified using buttons in the lower part of
the desktop area.
Related information
Screen View in Desktop Area
Mini Toolbar Options
The mini toolbar is a context menu addition with a subset of common controls
from the Format, Tag/Security and Name groups.
•
ShowMinitoolbarAutomatic: When this option is set to True the mini
toolbar part of the context menu is displayed already when an object is
selected. The mini toolbar will always show in combination with the context
menu. The mini toolbar will remain active for a selected object, also after
it has disappeared, until the selection or the pointer moves away. To show
the mini toolbar again move the mouse pointer to the upper right of the
object. With the default setting, False, the mini toolbar will only show in
combination with the context menu for an object.
Exit
Clicking the Exit button closes the application. If there are unsaved changes, you
are asked if you want to save them before exiting.
3.1.6
Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar contains controls, expected to be used frequently. The
toolbar can be customized to include other buttons.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
41
Development Environment
Save
Saves the current project to the location specified when the project was created.
Undo
Executed commands can be undone using the Undo button. Clicking the small
arrow at the right of the Undo button lists recently made changes for selection of
the undo operation.
The keyboard shortcut for Undo is Ctrl + Z.
Redo
A command that has been undone with Undo can be redone with Redo. The
keyboard shortcut for Redo is Ctrl + Y.
Run
Performs a validation of script code and compiles the project. If the project is valid,
a simulation is started on the development PC with connection to the selected
controller. Also available from the Transfer/Test group on the Project ribbon tab.
Simulate
Performs a validation of script code and compiles the project. If the project is valid,
a simulation is started on the development PC without connection to the selected
controller. Also available from the Transfer/Test group on the Project ribbon tab.
Related information
Project Ribbon Tab
Customizing Quick Access Toolbar
Some of the ribbon controls can be added to the Quick Access Toolbar. Right-click
on the desired control and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar or Remove from
Quick Access Toolbar.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
42
Development Environment
3.1.7
Ribbon Tabs
The ribbon tabs contain grouped controls for editing and maintaining a project,
screens and objects. Click on any ribbon tab to display the ribbon.
Use Minimize the Ribbon and Maximize the Ribbon to collapse and expand the
ribbon control tabs, or double-click on a ribbon tab. This can also be done from
the Quick Access toolbar.
Related information
Home Ribbon Tab
Project Ribbon Tab
System Ribbon Tab
Insert Ribbon Tab
View Ribbon Tab
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
General Ribbon Tab
Actions Ribbon Tab
Quick Access Toolbar
3.1.8
Additional Properties
Some ribbon groups include additional properties that can be configured by
clicking the small arrow in the lower right corner of the current group.
The properties window displays available property groups available for selection
at the left. The property groups available differ depending on which object is
selected.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
43
Development Environment
3.2
Desktop Area
The desktop area displays screens and configuration pages for project components
such as controllers and functions. The desktop area shows only one screen or
component at a time. When multiple screens or components are opened a row of
tabs are shown in the upper part of the desktop area. Clicking on a tab activates
its contents for editing.
If there are more tabs open than can be displayed, navigation arrows in the upper
part of the desktop area can be used to scroll between them.
3.2.1
Screen View in Desktop Area
Object appearance as well as size and appearance of the current screen can be
managed by controls in the lower part of the desktop area. It is also possible to
turn on and off the in-place editing function that allows editing text in an object
directly when selecting it on the screen.
Show/Hide Size and Distance Information
The size of an object is displayed while resizing it. Distance to the edges of the
desktop area is displayed when moving an object.
Show Size and Distance Information is activated
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
44
Development Environment
Show/Hide Info
It is possible to show information about which tag each object is connected to, and
if dynamics or actions are configured for the object, by clicking on the Show/Hide
Info button.
Show Info is activated
Show/Hide Screen Tooltips
A semi-transparent tooltip is displayed for each object when the cursor is rested on
it, if Show Screen Tooltips is selected. Tooltips for e.g. menu commands are not
affected by this setting; only tooltips for objects on the screen.
Show Screen Tooltips is activated
Enable/Disable In-place Editing
This option allows editing an object directly when selecting it on the screen
without having to access its properties on e.g. the General ribbon tab.
In-place Editing is enabled
Show/Hide Panel Frame
Show/Hide Panel Frame displays or hides a virtual panel frame surrounding the
screen, when an operator panel is selected as target.
Fit to Screen
Click on Fit to Screen to make the screen the maximum size that will fit in the
desktop area.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
45
Development Environment
Zoom
The following methods can be used to zoom in to or out from the desktop area:
•
Selecting a set zoom value from the Zoom drop-down list.
•
Setting the Zoom Slider to a desired zoom level.
•
Clicking the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons.
•
Placing the mouse pointer anywhere in the screen and using the scroll wheel.
Pan
Panning of the current screen is possible in Layout mode, if the screen is larger than
the desktop area.
• Press and hold [Spacebar] (the mouse pointer will change its appearance from
an arrow shape to an open hand).
• Drag to pan the screen (the mouse pointer hand closes in panning mode).
3.2.2
Desktop View Modes
Screens and functions have different view modes. The default setting is Layout
view mode, but screens and functions can be partly viewed and edited directly in
code. The desired mode is selected from the lower left part of the desktop area.
The code for screens is in xaml and in C# for script.
Desktop view mode tabs
Caution:
Incorrect code entered in text mode (Xaml and Script) may result in errors that are not
possible to recognize during analysis and build.
Erroneous code may result in unpredictable behavior and loss of data.
Layout
Screens and objects are usually edited in Layout view mode.
XAML
A screen layout is defined in XAML (eXtensible Application Markup Language)
code. The .xaml files are stored in the project folder.
XAML code can be added and changed in the Xaml view mode. Any changes done
in the XAML code will affect the screen layout.
Script
In Script view mode scripted actions can be configured for screens, objects, tags,
function keys etc.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
46
Development Environment
Note:
To display a script guide that describes iX Developer scripting possibilities in detail,
select Script view mode, click anywhere in the code, and press F1.
Caution:
Beijer Electronics only offers support for scripting for the included examples in iX
Developer
Objects that can trigger events will show with expandable nodes in the Script view.
Clicking the [+] of such a node expands it and shows the trigger events for the
object. Double-clicking on an event inserts its method heading with an empty
code body. Scripts are written in C# syntax.
When actions are defined for an object, this will have precedence over script code.
Note:
Avoid using multiple trigger methods as this may lead to undesired behavior.
Use either a script or define actions with the controls on the Actions tab. Avoid using
Click Action Trigger actions in combination with Mouse Button Action Triggers.
Note:
Creating scripts that block execution, waiting for other resources or user input, is not
supported.
Note:
The ValueOff and ValueOn events for internal variables are available for selection in
script mode, but they are not executed when running the project.
Note:
The ValueChangeOrError event is available in script mode, but it should only be used
with controller tags. It does not support internal variables or system tags.
Note:
If an external editor, e.g. Visual Studio, is used for editing a script, the cross-reference
will not be updated when building the project in iX Developer. The Remove Unused
Tags function will report tags used in these scripts as unused.
For iX Developer to recognize a change made with an external editor, the script file
needs to be opened in iX Developer and provided with just any small change using the
script editor in iX Developer. Save the project once more before build.
Note:
Avoid static state when using script since this might cause memory leaks.
Always remember to unsubscribe events previously subscribed to, in order to avoid
memory leaks.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
47
Development Environment
Complex behavior can be created using script code.
Selections made in Layout view mode are kept when switching to Script view
mode and vice versa.
Nodes with edited script code are highlighted in the expanded tree view.
Highlight of an edited node in the tree view
It is possible to disable a script without deleting it, by right-clicking on a node with
script, and selecting Unhook event handler. This excludes the script from being
run, even though there is code, and the node will no longer be highlighted.
Some objects, such as text boxes, list boxes and combo boxes, rely on script code
for advanced behavior.
Name Completion
A context sensitive name completion feature (IntelliSense) can be activated during
typing with [Ctrl] + [Spacebar] and it triggers automatically when a period (‘.’)
is typed after a code element. Using items outside the current scope is defined
with the keyword Globals, but it is not possible to script to other screens than the
currently selected.
Methods are completed without argument lists. Add parenthesis and arguments
to complete a selection.
Note:
Incorrect script code may result in errors that are not possible to recognize during
analysis and build. Erroneous code may result in unpredictable behavior and loss of
data.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
48
Development Environment
Note:
Not all tags available in Tags are visible in IntelliSense when scripting. The name
completion function will not show tags and objects that have names similar to script
command names.
If there are errors in script code during validation of a project, it is possible to
navigate to the erroneous position by double-clicking the error in the error list.
Press [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Spacebar] while editing to get a tool tip with the allowed
variants of an overloaded method. Use [Up arrow] or [Down arrow] to scroll.
Make a new selection or press [Esc] to close the tool tip.
Note:
It is necessary to do an explicit type casting of the tag format for operands of an
overloaded method.
Script code can be used to format objects. If an object attribute is selected a tool
tip with allowed methods will appear. Methods not part of the default C# API is
either addressed with the full path or the library can be included.
Related information
Error List
Tag Format
Format Group
Example:
Filling a rectangle object using a color gradient from one color to another color.
The following code implements a gradient from red to purple in the rectangle.
The library with the “BrushCF()” method is added with “using” in the beginning
of the example, together with the default libraries.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
49
Development Environment
Note:
When a timer is used in script code, it is important to close the timer in the code.
Note:
Renaming objects and screens included in scripts in Layout mode will cause the scripts
not to function.
Referenced Assemblies
Third-part components and objects that are added to the project via Referenced
Assemblies will be made available when scripting. Their methods and properties
will be included by the name completion function, in the same way as for built-in
components.
Related information
Referenced Assemblies
Name Completion
Aliases
Aliases can be configured in the Aliases view mode.
Related information
Aliases
3.2.3
Positioning Windows
The behavior of many windows can be adapted in order to suit the user; for
example shown or hidden, or moved to another position on the desktop.
Docked windows representing control tools can be converted to floating windows.
Control tools can be docked separately or be managed as a tabbed group in a
window. A docked tool window supports auto-hide.
When a window is dockable, a guide diamond appears when the window is moved
on the desktop. Extended position arrows appear at the desktop edges. The guide
diamond makes it possible to dock a tool window to one of the four sides of the
desktop area. When a tool window is undocked, it floats on top of the desktop.
Dropping a tool at the center of a guide diamond creates a tabbed group of the
tools inside the window that the guide diamond belongs to.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
50
Development Environment
Docking a Tool
Drag the window heading to any position on the screen. If the tool is not docked
it will become floating.
To re-dock a tool:
1. If the tool is docked already, double-click on its heading to change to floating.
2. Drag the tool to the center of the desktop. A guide diamond appears, pointing
towards the four edges of the desktop. Release the window to the desired
direction. When the mouse pointer is in position, an outline of the window
appears in the designated area.
Docking a Tabbed Group
It is possible to dock a tool to an existing group of tools, creating a grouped
window with tabs:
1. If the tool is docked already, double-click on its heading to change to floating.
2. Drag the tool to the center of the existing group. A guide diamond appears.
3. Drop the tool at the guide diamond center.
Releasing a Tool from a Tabbed Group
When a window contains multiple tools, they appear as tabs in the lower part of
the window. To release a tool that resides in a tabbed group, drag the tab for the
tool and drop it on the desktop.
Auto-Hide
Auto-Hide enables a maximized view of the desktop area by minimizing tool
windows along the edges of the desktop area when not in use. Auto-Hide is turned
on and off by clicking the Auto-Hide pushpin icon on the window title bar.
Tool windows expand to their original size when the pointer hovers over them.
When a hidden tool window loses focus, it slides back to its tab on the edge of the
desktop area. While a tool window is hidden, its name and icon are visible on a tab
at the edge of the desktop area.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
51
Development Environment
Note:
The Auto-Hide function has to be turned off before a tool can be moved.
3.2.4
Configuration Pages
Many functions, such as Alarm Server and Data Logger, are configured via table
style configuration pages.
In some cases there are multiple configuration pages for a feature. When
applicable, the configuration page for a feature can be opened to allow direct
access. For example, it is possible not only to select a tag, but also to declare new
tags, directly through the Select Tag field for an object.
Home
In a configuration page, the Home tab is used to add and remove items in a
function or controller.
Edit Table Cells
Use the Add button to append a new item in the table view of the configuration
page.
Use the Delete button in the Home tab or the Delete button on the keyboard to
remove the active row in the table. Multiple rows can be selected using the [Ctrl]
or [Shift] keys.
Keyboard Navigation
Navigation in configuration pages can be made using arrow keys or with [Tab].
Pressing F4 inside a table cell will in some cases open selection list.
Pressing [Enter] acknowledges a selection, and pressing [Esc] cancels a selection.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
52
Development Environment
Press [Delete] to remove a value when editing in a field. If a row is selected when
pressing [Delete], the entire row will be removed from the table.
Use [Spacebar] to toggle a value in a check box.
Press [Ctrl] + [Tab] to shift focus from the table.
Navigation in Layered Pages
A layered configuration page (for example the alarm items page) has some specific
navigation functions.
Keyboard navigation down is made by pressing [Ctrl] + [Down Arrow]. This will
navigate into an expanded group, and out again when at the last of the expanded
rows.
Keyboard navigation up and out of a group is done by pressing [Up Arrow].
Expand a group with [Ctrl] + [+], collapse with [Ctrl] + [-].
Keyboard navigation between fields inside a group is made with [Right Arrow]
or [Left Arrow].
Pressing [Enter] acknowledges a selection, and pressing [Esc] cancels a selection.
Auto Fill
Fields in the configuration tables are when possible automatically filled in when
[Down Arrow] is pressed when at the last table row. When needed, names and
tag identifiers are incremented to avoid exact copies of symbolic names and tag
identifiers. Incrementing is done if the last part of the string is an integer number.
A “1” will be appended to the string if no numeral character ends the string. This is
useful when there are consecutive tags of the same type in the controller data.
Filtering Items
Items in configuration pages can be filtered by selecting Show Selection from the
Show Selection/Show All button.
Clicking the button opens the Filter Builder.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
53
Development Environment
Several conditions can be used, and the different values/operators that can be used
for making conditions are displayed when clicking on the condition building
blocks.
Operands and operator nodes are context sensitive. Name strings are not case
sensitive. Values in the filter builder are saved individually for each function
during an edit session. A filter is built as a logical expression tree. A filter typically
has operations on individual column values as leaf nodes and logical operators
serve as main nodes.
The following color scheme is used:
Color
Function
Red
Logical operator
Blue
Column operand
Green
Value operator
Grey
Value operand
An indication that a filter is used is displayed at the lower part of the configuration
page.
Selecting Show All from the Show Selection/Show All button in the
configuration page displays the complete, unfiltered list.
3.3
Screens
Screens contain objects that can be displayed for the operator in runtime. A
screen can contain predefined objects, such as buttons or an alarm list. Pictures of
physical objects, such a pump, connected to controller data, can also be included
to be used for control and monitoring of the physical object.
Properties are defined for each screen.
Screens are edited in the desktop area and can be managed from:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
54
Development Environment
Location
Used for
The Navigation
Manager
Adding new screens, managing links between screens,
deleting screens
The Screens list in the
Project Explorer
Adding new screens, importing screens from other
projects, renaming screens, setting screen as startup
screen, saving screens as templates, deleting screens,
editing screen scripts
The Screen group of the
Home ribbon tab
Adding new screens, selection of screen template and
background screen, deleting screens, language selection,
screen security
The Screen group of the
General ribbon tab
Managing popup screen properties and selecting screens
for preloading
3.3.1
Screen Name and Screen Title
All screens have unique names, visible e.g. in the Project Explorer and the
Navigation Manager. Names of all open screens are shown as tabs in the desktop
area. The name of the current screen is displayed and can be changed in the Name
group of the Home tab.
In runtime, the screen name is displayed together with the project title in the title
bar as default. To display something other than the screen name, a screen title may
be added in the Screen group on the General tab when the screen is selected.
Note:
The screen name in iX Developer is not updated when the screen title (for display in
runtime) is renamed.
If the project title on the Project tab is left empty, only the screen name or screen
title is displayed.
3.3.2
Background Screen
It is possible to use another screen as background screen, to, for example, create a
uniform design of the screens in the project and avoid repetitive configuration.
Background screens belong to the current project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
55
Development Environment
Example
Follow the steps below to use a background screen:
1. Create a background screen with some reusable elements, such as navigation
buttons, and rename it to a suitable name.
2. Create a new screen.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
56
Development Environment
3. Keep the new screen open on the desktop, and select the background screen
from the Screen group of the Home ribbon tab.
The background screen is now used for the screen.
Any modification made to the background screen will be reflected in all screens
using it.
3.3.3
Startup Screen
The startup screen is the first screen that opens when a project is executed. By
default, Screen1 is set as startup screen.
Another startup screen can be set at any time by right-clicking on the screen on the
desktop or in the Project Explorer and selecting Set as Startup Screen.
The selected startup screen is easily distinguished from the other screens in the
Project Explorer by a blue outline when in focus.
3.3.4
Screen Template
The installation of iX Developer includes a number of screen templates with basic
functionality. It is also possible to save your own screens as screen templates, by
right-clicking on the current screen and selecting Save Screen as Template.
The screen template can be used in the current or other iX Developer projects.
If a selected screen template contains tags that were not previously included in the
project, you can select to automatically add these to the Tags list.
To use a template screen, click the lower part of the Add Screen button in the
Screen group of the Home ribbon tab. A preview of screen templates is displayed.
User-created as well as predefined screen templates may be deleted by
right-clicking on the template in the preview and selecting Delete Screen
Template. The folder of the selected screen is then permanently deleted from disk.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
57
Development Environment
3.3.5
Screen Security
Using security settings for screens makes it possible to restrict access to screens
based on user security groups, similarly to object security.
It is not possible to set security for the Startup screen.
When using a background screen, the security settings of the top level screen are
applied.
When screens are imported from other iX Developer projects or from
Information Designer, security settings are included and will be used in the
current project.
Related information
Object Security and Visibility
3.3.6
Popup Screen
Normally, only one screen is visible in the operator panel in runtime. Sometimes, a
popup screen that behaves like as a floating window may be useful. Any screen can
be configured as a popup screen:
1. Check Popup screen in the Screen group of the General tab.
2. Set the start position coordinates (X, Y) to determine where the screen will
open. The position (1,1) corresponds to the upper left corner of the screen.
3. Set the desired width and height in pixels of the screen resolution.
Clicking Modify Screen Size/Position allows changing the popup screen
size and position by dragging it with the cursor. The coordinates are updated
automatically.
Modal Popup Screen
Checking the Modal option makes the selected popup screen modal, which means
that the user cannot interact with other screens while this screen is visible. All
other screens will still be updated.
Note:
It is not recommended to have more than two parallel modal popup screens open at
the same time.
Note:
Do not use multiple modal popups triggered by background events such as alarms, tag
value changes, etc.
Style
Different styles can be selected for popup screens for PC targets.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
58
Development Environment
Note:
When using a web browser or pdf viewer object in a popup screen, only the default style
for the popup screen is supported.
Open Popup Screen
A popup screen is opened in runtime by a Show Screen action on an object.
Note:
When configuring a Show Screen action for a popup screen, position of the screen can
be selected. These settings override the settings made in the Screen group of the
General tab.
Close Popup Screen
A popup screen is closed in runtime by a Close Screen action on an object.
If the Close Screen action is triggered from a tag, this will close both the popup
screen and the parent screen.
3.3.7
Preloading Screens
The first time a screen is opened in a running project, some time elapses while
compiling it. In order to minimize this time, it is possible to preload a maximum
of 10 screens from the Screen group on the General tab while the screen is selected.
The selected screens will then be loaded at application startup instead of when
opening the screen.
Note:
The time saved at screen opening is instead added to the application startup time.
Events related to screen actions (Screen Opened, Screen Closed and Screen
Closing) will not be carried out when a screen is preloaded.
Preloading the startup screen (or its background screen) has no effect. Popup
screens cannot be preloaded.
The preload function is available for operator panel targets only.
3.3.8
Importing Screens
Screens from other projects can be imported, by right-clicking in Screens area of
the Project Explorer and selecting Import.
If the selected screen has a name identical to one of the existing screens, a new
screen name is proposed.
If the imported screen includes tags that do not already exist in projects, you are
asked if you want to add these.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
59
Development Environment
Note:
No tag information, other than tag names, will be added by the import function.
3.3.9
Grid
There are different methods to align objects in screens; Snap objects to other
objects and Snap objects to grid. Grid properties are managed by right-clicking
on the current screen and selecting Grid from the context menu. It is also possible
to select not to snap objects.
Grid settings are global and will affect all screens.
Snap Objects to Other Objects
To help position objects in a screen snap lines will appear when an object is moved
across the screen. The snap lines are used to align the dragged object with other
objects on the screen.
Blue snap lines appear whenever the right, left, top, or bottom boundaries coincide
with other object boundaries. A horizontal red snap line indicates that the center
of the object is aligned with the center of another object. For vertical center
alignment, select the objects and use Align Center in the Arrange control of the
Format group.
Snap Objects to Grid
Use the context menu and select Snap to Grid to enable binding to grid points for a
moved object. Snap to Grid mode disables Snap Lines for dragged objects.
Grid
The different grid styles can be used as a help pattern when doing the layout of the
objects on the screen.
Grid setting
Description
Spacing
Number of pixels between grid lines
Show grid on screen
Displays the grid on the screen
Grid style
Selection between dots and lines as grid style
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
60
Development Environment
3.4
Objects
Objects that can be created in a screen are available from the Objects group and
the Component Library.
Snap lines are used to position objects in a screen and align a moved object with
other objects.
Information about tag connections as well as size and distance information for
objects on the current screen can be displayed by using the buttons in the lower
part of the desktop area.
Related information
Objects
3.4.1
Handling Objects
Create
To insert a default-sized object, click the position on the screen where you want to
place the object.
To give the object a specific size and shape, press the mouse button and drag to
create the object on the screen. Press and hold [Shift] while creating an object to
retain the aspect ratio of the object.
When creating a line object, press and hold [Shift] to constrain the line at 45
degrees angles.
Select
The Select tool is available at top left in the Objects group when the group is not
expanded. The Select tool is the default tool when editing screens. After applying
any other object control, the mouse pointer will return to the Select tool. When
the Select tool hovers over a selected object the mouse pointer changes to a cross
with arrowheads.
Move
The position of an object is part of the properties for the object. The position of an
object can be changed in different ways:
• Click and drag an object to move it to the desired position.
• Open the property grid and edit the Left and Top coordinates.
To move the selected object one pixel at the time, select the object and use the
arrow keys on the keyboard.
Copy and Move
Use [Ctrl] + drag to make a copy of the selected object, and to move it to the
desired position.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
61
Development Environment
Resize
The size of an object is part of the properties for the object. To change the size of
an object:
• When the Select tool hovers over the resize handles of a selected object, the
mouse pointer changes to an arrow. Resize the object to the desired size.
• Open the property grid and edit the Height and Width values.
To resize the selected object one pixel at the time, select the object, press [Shift]
and use the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Rotate
Rotate is only supported for projects designed for PC targets, and not for all
objects.
Angle and rotation center is part of the properties for an object. The rotation
center for an object is shown as a small white circle which by default is located in
the center of the selected object.
When the Select tool hovers over the rotation center of a selected object the mouse
pointer changes to a circle inside a square with arrow sides. This indicates that it is
possible to move the rotation center.
To change the rotation center of an object:
1. Point to an object to select it. When an object is selected a red frame with
handles is shown around the object.
2. Drag-and-drop the rotation center circle to the position that is to be the center
of the rotation.
When the Select tool hovers next to a corner of the selection frame for a selected
object the mouse pointer changes to a circular arrow. This indicates that the object
is possible to rotate by the frame handle around the rotation center.
To change the rotation angle of an object:
1. Drag to rotate the object around its center position.
2. Use [Ctrl] + drag to rotate in steps of 15 degrees.
Cursor appearance for Resize, Rotation centre, and Rotate.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
62
Development Environment
Selecting Multiple Objects
Multiple objects on the current screen can be selected at the same time, with the
use of the mouse pointer to draw a frame that touches the objects. Alternatively,
select one object and then use [Ctrl] + click to select or de-select other objects.
A multiple selection can be used to arrange objects, by using the Arrange control
on the Format ribbon tab. The object with the primary selection is used as guide
object.
When multiple objects are selected, the primary selection is shown with a red
frame, while all other objects in the group have blue frames.
Click on any object in the group to change this to the primary selection. A click or
double-click on any object will make it the primary selection, and, if applicable,
change the ribbon focus according to the selected ribbon behavior.
The groups shown in the General and the Actions tabs are dependent on the
selection. When multiple objects are selected the tabs will show only the properties
that are common for the objects in the selection. Property changes will affect all
selected objects.
Hiding and Locking Objects
Objects can easily be hidden and locked using the Object Browser, but the
commands are also available from the context menu. To make a hidden object
visible again, or to unlock a locked object, the Object Browser can be used.
Related information
Object Browser
Property Grid
Creating Series
The Create series function facilitates creating a number of identical objects. The
function handles adding graphic elements as well as controller connections.
The following example creates a series of analog numeric objects quickly and
easily:
1. Create an analog numeric object and connect it to a tag (in this example; D0).
2. Right-click on the object and select Create series from the context menu.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
63
Development Environment
3. Fill in the number of objects to add and make settings for the address
incrementation, and click OK.
Parameter
Description
Number of copies
Enter the number of columns and rows to create
Spacing
Specify the number of pixels between the added objects
Address
incrementation
Select how to increment addresses for the added objects.
Only addresses available in the driver will be added.
Increment direction
Select if addresses are to be incremented in horizontal or
vertical direction
Graphical objects are added on the screen according to the settings made:
Tags are added to the project according to the settings made:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
64
Development Environment
Right-clicking in the Tags configuration page and selecting Create series makes it
possible to create a series of tags quickly and easily, without adding graphic objects.
3.5
Navigation Manager
The Navigation Manager is used to manage screens and their relations with respect
to project navigation in runtime. It can be activated/deactivated from the View
tab. It provides an overview of all screens in the current project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
65
Development Environment
3.5.1
Screen Relations
The Navigation Manager is used to create relationships between screens.
Dragging the mouse pointer from one screen to another screen creates a relation. A
button with a Click action is defined in the first screen. This Show Screen action
has the second screen as target, and when clicking it in runtime, the second screen
is opened.
Double-click on a screen to open the screen for editing in the desktop area.
3.5.2
Add Screen
New screens can be added directly in the Navigation Manager.
Dragging the mouse pointer from an existing screen to an empty location in the
Navigation Manager area creates a new screen, with a relation to the original
screen. A button with a Click action is defined in the first screen. This Show
Screen action has the second screen as target, and when clicking it in runtime, the
second screen is opened. The button must be removed or changed manually if
the new screen is deleted later.
3.5.3
Links in the Navigation Manager
A structure of screens and their relations to other screens will be imposed and
shown in the Navigation Manager. The Navigation Manager will provide an
overview to help add screens and manage the link relations between project
screens.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
66
Development Environment
Right-click anywhere in the Navigation Manager to change link appearance.
Link setting
Description
Show Same Level
References
Filters out links to screens on the same hierarchical level.
Show Back References
Shows navigation links to higher hierarchical levels. When
not selected, only links to screens on lower levels and
links between screens on the same level are shown.
Directed Links
Draws straight link lines between screens, using the
shortest way.
Orthogonal Links
Draws link lines in an orthogonal pattern.
Changing the setting or the type affects the appearance in the Navigation Manager
only.
3.5.4
Navigation Overview
It is also possible to display the Navigation Overview by selecting it from the View
ribbon tab. It provides an overview of all screens included in the project, with
zooming facilities.
3.6
Project Explorer
The Project Explorer shows all screens and components included in the
application. It can be activated/deactivated from the View tab.
The Project Explorer is divided into five groups; . Screens, Functions, Data
Loggers, Script Modules and Recipes.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
67
Development Environment
3.6.1
Project Explorer Groups
Click on the group heading to expand/collapse the groups. The number of
components in each folder is apparent from the group headings. Right-clicking on
a group opens a subset of the commands from the File menu and Insert tab.
Right-clicking on a component in a Project Explorer group opens a context menu
with a selection of common operations. Not all commands are available for all
components.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
68
Development Environment
Context menu
command
Description
Show
Opens the selected project component for editing in the
desktop area
Rename
Renames the selected project component
Add
Adds a new project component to the project
Import
Imports a project component via browsing the hard disk; e.g. a
screen from another project
Delete
Deletes the selected component from the project
Screens
The Screens explorer lists the screens included in the application. Clicking on a
screen opens it for editing in the desktop area.
Screen Context Menu
Right-clicking a screen opens a context menu with a selection of available
operations:
•
Show
•
Rename
•
Import
•
Delete
•
Set as startup screen
•
Save screen as template screen
•
Add to screen group
•
Remove from screen group
The screen set to be the startup screen is marked with a green frame in the screens
explorer.
Groups
The Screens explorer offers a possibility to assign screens to groups.
•
Right-click on the All screens heading in the Screens explorer and select Add
group followed by entering a unique name for the group in the appearing
dialog.
•
To assign a screen to a group, simply right-click a screen in the Screens
explorer and select “Add to Screen Group” from the context menu. Select a
group to add the screen to from the appearing “Select Screen group” dialog.
•
To show available groups, double-click the All screens heading in the Screens
explorer. Screens not assigned to a group will be listed as ungrouped screens.
•
Right-clicking a group enables a context menu from which you can choose to
rename or delete the group.
Note:
Deleting a Screen group also deletes all of its assigned screens.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
69
Development Environment
It is also possible to assign a screen to a group by a simple drag and drop operation.
Drag the screen symbol and release it on the group.
Zoom Slider
The Zoom slider is found in the Screens explorer and provides a way to quickly
zoom in and out of your screens explorer.
Search
The search function provides the option to search for screens using the screen
name or screen-id.
The search is only performed within the selected group.
Functions
The Alarm Server, Multiple Languages and Security functions are predefined, as
well as Tags, and cannot be deleted from the Functions folder. The other functions
can be added from the Insert menu. Most functions will be available from the
Functions folder after having added them to the project, but some functions are
assigned folders of their own.
Clicking on the function in the Functions folder opens its configuration pages
for editing in the desktop area.
Alarm Distributor
Alarms can be distributed between operator panels, with notification via printer,
SMS or e-mail using the alarm distributor.
Related information
Alarm Distributor
Alarm Server
The Alarm Server handles alarm groups and alarm items.
Related information
Alarm Server
Alarm Groups
Alarm Items
Audit Trail
The Audit Trail function enables tracking of operator actions.
Related information
Audit Trail
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
70
Development Environment
Function Keys
Function keys for operator panels as well as for the regular PC keyboard can be
configured.
Related information
Function Keys
Multiple Languages
Configuring multiple languages for user texts and system texts are supported. The
texts can be exported, edited and reimported to the project. A tool for automatic
translations is also included.
Related information
Language Management
Reports
The reports function allows adding excel report templates to the project.
Related information
Reports
Scheduler
A scheduler can be used to control events in the process at special times.
Related information
Scheduler
Security
Users and groups of users can be set up for security purposes.
Related information
Security Management
Tags
Clicking on Tags in the Functions folder displays the tags configuration page in
the desktop with all the tags that are used in the application. Tags are added by
clicking on the Add Tag/Add System Tag button.
Tags can belong to a connected controller, or be internal. Internal tags can be used
and selected in the same way as a regular controller tags.
System tags are used to monitor or access variables from the system, for example
Used RAM or DateTime. System tags are indicated by blue color in the tag list.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
71
Development Environment
Related information
Tags
Internal Tags
System Tags
Text Library
With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked
to texts.
Related information
Text Library
Recipes
Several recipes can be inserted in the project. Each recipe function handles a
pre-defined set of recipe items.
Related information
Recipe Management
Script Modules
Clicking on a script module in the Script Modules folder opens the script editor
in the desktop area. A script module can be included to program features not
covered by included functions and actions, or to be used to share functionality
among functions.
There is also a script action function that can be used to apply script modules to an
object in the same way as with other trigger actions.
Related information
Script
Script Action
Data Loggers
Data can be logged and saved to a database on time intervals or depending on
changed values.
Related information
Data Logger
3.7
Component Library
The Component Library contains reusable components for a project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
72
Development Environment
3.7.1
Components
The Component Library includes a large number of predefined graphical objects,
categorized into groups. User-defined graphical objects and other files may also be
saved in the component library. All components in a sub folder must have unique
names.
Examples of components that may be included in the library:
•
predefined components
•
objects
•
text objects configured with multiple texts
•
symbol objects configured with multiple symbols
•
grouped objects
•
external pictures
•
text
•
folders (file folders)
•
HTM/HTML files
•
media files
•
PDF files
Since plain text can be saved as a component, it is possible to save reusable script
components by dragging a section of script code from the Script view into the
Component Library.
A component is displayed with its name and a thumbnail representation in the
Component Library window.
Grouped objects are displayed as a thumbnail representing the primary
selection of the object. Text files and folders are represented by operating system
thumbnails.
Note:
Only static graphical objects are supported in iX Developer.
Project Pictures
The Project Pictures folder is project specific, and contains pictures that are used in
the current project. The components in Project Pictures are stored in the project’s
Symbols folder.
Project Files
The Project Files folder is project specific, and contains files that have been added
when creating the project.
Project files and folders can be added and deleted from the Project Files folder
before downloading the project to an operator panel. The Project Files folder
is located in the Project folder.
For instance, “C:\MyProjects\ProjectFolder\Project Files”.
It is also possible to access the operator panel via FTP to add and delete files and
folders after the download, provided that the FTP service is enabled in the project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
73
Development Environment
Related information
FTP
Download
3.7.2
Add and Use Components
Drag-and-drop any component from the library to the current screen, or use copy
[Ctrl + C] and paste [Ctrl + V] commands.
Objects can be copied or moved to the Component Library.
A text file, that is saved in the Component Library will be converted to a text box
object when pasted into a screen.
A component (picture or group) that is originally copied from an object with a tag
connection will keep its tag connection and any dynamic properties when used
from the Component Library.
Note:
If a component with a tag association is reused in another project then all referenced
tags must be present in the new project.
3.7.3
Component Library Window
The component library is available as a tab at the right-hand side of the
desktop. The window is configured with auto-hide functions, and can also be
activated/deactivated from the View ribbon tab. Its appearance can be managed
just as other tools; as docked or floating windows.
The Component Library is also accessible when selecting and placing the Picture
object from the Home ribbon tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
74
Development Environment
User-Defined Categories
Right-click on an empty space of the Component Library window and select Add
Component to add a component to the library. To create a new category, select
Add Category and choose a name of your preference. A category could also be
renamed or deleted.
User-defined categories are not project specific. This means that all objects saved
in a user-defined category will be available in all iX Developer projects.
Exporting and Importing Components
By using the Import and Export functions in the Component Library, categories
of components can easily be copied and moved between projects. Right-click on
the category folder and select Import or Export. Find the location in the project
file from where the components should be imported or to where they should be
exported. The program will not indicate where the component files are located.
Single objects can not be exported or imported.
Expand and Collapse Folders
The top area is a contents frame that is used to navigate through the folders of the
Component Library. The contents heading displays the name of the currently
selected folder. The folder view can be expanded and collapsed with the control to
the left of the displayed folder name.
The display of the components is filtered through the selection of the folders, i.e.
all components are displayed if the top folder is selected.
Search
The Search feature provides a case-insensitive and alphabetical search, based on
the component label, in the current folder and in all sub folders.
Zoom
The Zoom slider at the bottom area of the tool window can be used to change the
size of the displayed components. Resting the mouse pointer over a component
displays a full-size picture of the component.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
75
Development Environment
Component Library window, displaying full size of a selected component
XAML Guidelines
All information, including the image, must be contained within the XAML-file.
Links to external objects will result in missing objects. Furthermore, the
appearance of the XAML-file may not be dependent of external inputs, like for
example a parameter controlling a multi-picture based on internal logic within the
XAML-file.
The following restrictions apply:
Do Not Name Controls in XAML
Not supported:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
76
Development Environment
Supported:
Specify Width and Height
The root control must specify a width and a height.
Not supported:
Supported:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
77
Development Environment
Bindings
These are the only properties that are supported for XAML-binding within
components:
•
ISymbolViewboxSignature.Fill is presented as “Fill” within the property grid
•
ISymbolViewboxSignature.Stroke is presented as “Outline” within the
property grid
•
ISymbolViewboxSignature.StrokeThickness is presented as
“Outline Thickness” within the property grid
It is not supported to bind to anything outside of the component.
Supported:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
78
Development Environment
3.8
Property Grid
Most properties and settings for an
object or screen are defined from its
General and Home tabs.
A detailed overview of object properties
is available by selecting Property Grid
from the View ribbon tab or by selecting
Properties from the context menu.
The property grid includes more
properties and settings than the ribbon
tabs, for example size and position of
objects, and delay of mouse and touch
screen input in runtime.
Property groups can be collapsed/expanded.
The window is configured with auto-hide
functions. Its appearance can be
managed just as other tools; as docked
or floating windows.
3.8.1
Search
The Search feature provides a case-insensitive and alphabetical search, that makes
it easy to reduce the number of displayed properties.
3.8.2
Toggling views
The different views in the Property grid can be selected by using the menu on the
top of the window.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
79
Development Environment
Show only the properties marked as favorites
Show all properties in the Property Grid
Show all properties that do not have their default value
Select whether Favorites are editable or not
Show or hide the Copy Properties functions in the Property Grid
3.8.3
Favorites
The properties most commonly used can be added to a Favorites-category for
easier access. The favorites are saved per object type, i.e. Button has one set of
favorites, Analog Numeric has one set of favorites, Chart has one set and so on.
A yellow star indicates that the property is added as a favorite. By clicking the
star, the property is deselected and removed from the Favorites-category
When clicking on a greyed out star, the corresponding property is added to the
Favorites-category
3.8.4
Copy Properties
Multiple properties can be copied from one object to one or more targets.
The properties can be selected either one by one by clicking the checkbox
next to each property, or all at once by clicking the button for Select all,
followed by a click on the Copy Propertiesbutton. The values are then
pasted onto the target object(s) when selecting the target(s) and clicking
on Paste.
Note:
Only the properties that are shared by both source and target objects are transferred.
Selects all properties for the object
Deselects all properties for the object
Copies the selected properties to the clipboard
Clicking Paste pastes the copied properties
onto the selected object(s)
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
80
Development Environment
3.9
Object Browser
An overview of all objects included in a screen can be displayed in the Object
Browser.
It is easy to bring objects that may have been obscured by other objects up front, by
using the arrows at the top left.
Clicking the buttons at the right side of each object enables simply hiding/showing
and locking/unlocking objects.
Note that the top-to-bottom order in the Object browser corresponds to the
front-to-back order on the screen.
3.10 Output
The Output window contains messages concerning the project validation and
build. Created project files with folder paths and any found errors will be listed in
Output.
Note:
Incorrect code entered in text mode (Xaml and Script) may result in errors that are not
possible to recognize during analysis and build.
3.11 Error List
The Error List contains information about problems and errors detected in iX
Developer for the current project. Build errors are reported in the Output window.
3.12 Help
The Help file for iX Developer can be opened by pressing F1 on the keyboard or
using the Help button in the ribbon tab heading.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
81
Tags
4
Tags
Objects connected to tags can change values in a controller, and controller values
can be reflected by changing object appearance in various ways. Objects in a screen
will remain static until connected to a tag.
A tag has a symbolic name and can be of different data types.
Tags can belong to a connected controller, be internal or belong to the system.
Internal tags are used to handle local data values, and can be viewed and treated in
screens just like regular controller tags.
The global tag list provides an overview of all used tags, regardless of controller.
This makes it easy to develop projects that can be used with a variety of controllers.
It is also possible to connect a tag to more than one controller simultaneously.
4.1
Adding Tags
Tags are handled by clicking on Tags in the Functions folder in the Project
Explorer.
Clicking the Add Tag/Add System Tag button adds a new tag to the list. Make
settings for each added tag. When predefined values are available, these can be
selected by clicking the arrow at the right of the table cell.
4.1.1
Removing Unused Tags
The Delete button in Tags can be used to detect unused tags for immediate
removal via the Remove Unused Tags dialog.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
82
Tags
Similarly, when building the project, a notification of any unused tags will
automatically be done by displaying the Remove Unused Tags dialog. To disable
or enable pop-up of this dialog, go to Options in the File menu. Select Build
options in the list and then select CheckForUnusedTags under Misc. Change the
status of the function to True or False.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
83
Tags
Note:
Always review the candidates for removal prior to removing unused tags, since
removing tags that are used in e.g. a script can result in a corrupt project.
To be able to detect tags used in scripts, a certain syntax must be used. It is
recommended to use the IScriptTag interface within the arguments list for the
ScriptModule, thus enabling the ScriptModule to be used and reused without
being locked to a specific tag setup. Use the syntax Globals.Tags.TagName for
direct tag references within scripts and expressions.
If an external editor, e.g. Visual Studio, is used for editing a script, the
cross-reference will not be updated when building the project in iX Developer.
The Remove Unused Tags function will report tags used in these scripts as unused.
For iX Developer to recognize a change made with an external editor, the script file
needs to be opened in iX Developer and provided with just any small change using
the script editor in iX Developer. Save the project once more before build.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
84
Tags
The Sum method inside the script can be utilized in many different contexts. The
following picture shows how Tag3 will contain the sum of Tag1 and Tag2 when the
button is clicked. Notice that the tags used in scripts must be activated to work
as expected.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
85
Tags
Related information
Tags Editor Options
Options
4.1.2
Basic Settings
To reduce complexity in the tags configuration page, some columns can be made
hidden/visible. The basic settings are always displayed. It is possible to customize
which columns to show by default using Tags Editor Options.
Enter name, data type and access rights for the tag. Select if the tag is to belong to a
controller entered on the Controllers tab. If no controller tag address is entered,
the tag will be treated as an internal tag.
Parameter
Description
Name
Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric
string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).
Data Type (Tag)
Selection of presentation format; for example used
to show the correct engineering unit when using
scaling. DEFAULT follows selection made for Data Type
(Controller).
Access Rights
Defines access rights to the tag
Controller
Controller address
Data Type (Controller)
Selection of data type
To rename a tag it is necessary to enter the Rename dialog for the change to take
place. The dialog appears when clicking on the three dots to the right of the name
in the tags list.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
86
Tags
Related information
Scaling
4.1.3
Scaling
Scaling affects only tags connected to a controller.
Checking the Scaling box displays the Offset and Gain columns. These
parameters are used to change the scale of the controller value to a value shown in
accordance with the following equation:
Panel value = Offset + (Gain × Register value)
When the value for an object is changed from the operator panel, the scale is
changed to the value shown in accordance with the following equation:
Register value = (Panel value - Offset)/Gain
Scaling does not affect the defined maximum and minimum values, or the number
of decimals.
4.1.4
Data Exchange
Checking the Data Exchange box displays the Direction and When columns.
Data exchange supports real time data exchange between different controllers; also
of different brands. The data exchange can be performed when a digital tag is set or
at a certain time interval, set up on the Triggers tab. Data exchange can be selected
for individual tags, array tags or for the complete range of tags.
Related information
Data Exchange
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
87
Tags
4.1.5
Others
Checking the Others box makes it possible to configure a number of additional
tag properties.
Parameter
Description
Description
An optional description of the tag. Description of system tags
is added automatically.
Please note that the description can not be more than 200
characters long. Descriptions longer than that will cause build
errors.
Poll Group
Makes it possible to poll groups of tags at different intervals.
Always Active
Prevents the tag from becoming inactive. This may be useful for
actions and scripting purposes. Note: The Active setting for the
controller on the Controllers tab is predominant over the Always
Active setting for a particular tag.
Non Volatile
Keeps the last tag value in memory even when the panel or PC is
powered off. Only available for internal tags.
Initial Value
Makes it possible to assign a tag an initial value at system
startup. Only available for internal tags.
Index Register
Makes it possible to select a register from which an object is to
collect the shown value.
Action
Makes it possible to configure actions based on a condition of a
tag.
Log to Audit Trail
Logs operator actions on the tag. Only available if the Audit Trail
function is activated in the project.
Audit Trail
Description
Optional static or dynamic descriptions for operator tag
actions, that are saved in the Audit Trail database and visible
in the Audit Trail Viewer. If Dynamic Description is selected,
value before change can be included in the description by using
{0}; value after change by using {1}. Only available if the Audit
Trail function is activated in the project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
88
Tags
4.1.6
Adding Tags during Editing
Tags can be added directly when editing objects. When an object is selected, the
tag association can be managed from the Tag/Security group in the Home or
General ribbon tabs, or by right-clicking on the object and using the Mini Toolbar.
In both cases, tags are added by clicking the Add button.
Note:
Tags added during editing will stay internal until connected to a controller on the tags
configuration page.
Related information
Tag/Security Group
Mini Toolbar Options
4.1.7
Selecting Multiple Tags
Multiple rows of tags can be selected using the [Ctrl] or [Shift] keys. This makes it
easy to, for example, delete a number of tags quickly.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
89
Tags
4.2
Tag Actions
One or multiple actions can be configured depending on a changed value of a
tag. The Action column is displayed when the Others box is checked in the Tags
configuration page.
Clicking ... in the Actions column for the selected tag brings up the Action
properties window. First, a condition is configured by clicking Add under
Condition. Select a condition, enter a value (only integers are allowed) and click
OK.
Then, configure actions to be executed when the condition is met.
Related information
Actions Ribbon Tab
4.3
Internal Tags
Internal tags can be used to calculate values that need not be represented in the
controller, for example information only for the operator. Internal tags are selected
in the same way as an external controller tags. Any number of volatile user defined
tags can be created.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
90
Tags
Note:
Internal tag values will not be saved in the operator panel when the project is
restarted, unless the Non Volatile option is used.
Unlike the regular drivers, it does not matter if internal tags are used in consecutive
order or not.
4.4
System Tags
System tags are used to monitor or access variables from the system. System tags
are handled as regular controller tags, i.e. can be used in screens, logged, included
in scripts etc. The Date and Time system tags can be used when you want to use
the controller clock in the panel project. The following system tags are available:
System tag
group
Communication
Date and
Time
Project
System tag
Description
Communication Error
Message
Latest communication error message
Communication Errors
Number of active communication errors on
all controllers
Remote Alarm Server
Connection Errors
Number of remote alarm servers with
connection errors, e.g. disconnected
servers.
DateTime
Current date and time
Day
Day component of current date
Day of Week
Day of current week (1-7 where 1 is Sunday)
Hour
Hour component of current time
Minute
Minute component of current time
Month
Month component of current date
Second
Second component of current time
Year
Year component of current date
Current Screen Id
The ID of the current screen.
The data type of this tag is int16 and it only
has read access. This tag gets updated every
time you open a screen, with the exception
on popup screens. When opening a pop up
screen the current screen id tag will not be
updated. When entering a screen without a
screen id the tag value of the current screen
id will be set to -1. Note that 0 is a valid
screen id.
Current Screen Name
Name of the current screen
Latest Loaded Recipe
Name of the latest loaded recipe
New Screen Id
The ID of the new screen.
The data type of this tag is int16 and it has
read/write access. The tag is always active.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
91
Tags
System tag
group
System tag
Description
When the new screen id tag changes value
a screen jump is made to the screen with
corresponding screen id. If no such screen
exists a notification message will show.
If the new screen contains configured
screen instances (alias), the default
instance is always displayed.
System
Project Name
Name of the current project
Runtime Version
Runtime version of framework
Screen Update Time
Screen update time (in ms)
Available RAM
Amount of available RAM memory (in kB)
Available Storage
Amount of available storage memory (in MB)
Backlight Brightness
Level
Backlight brightness level (in percent)
When approaching 0% backlight, changes
in brightness level may no longer be
noticeable in the panel.
Complete dimming (to 0%) is only possible to
achieve with the marine panel types, such
as iX T7AM and iX T15BM.
CPU Load
Amount of used CPU capacity (in percent)
Current User
The user name of the currently logged in
user
Debug Logging
Enabled
Indicates if debug logging is enabled.
Internal Temperature
Internal panel temperature (in °C)
(1)
Physical RAM
RAM memory installed (in kB)
Power LED Blink
Frequency
Blink frequency of the power LED (1–10 Hz,
0 = always on)
Power LED Blue
Intensity
Intensity of the blue power LED (0–100)
Power LED Red
Intensity
Intensity of the red power LED (0–100)
Storage Memory
Storage memory installed in computer (in
MB)
Used RAM
Amount of used RAM memory (in kB)
Used RAM Percent
Amount of used RAM memory (in percent of
physical)
Used Storage
Amount of used storage memory (in MB)
Used Storage Percent
Amount of used storage memory (in percent
of all storage)
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
92
Tags
System tag
group
System tag
Windows CE Image
Version
Description
Windows CE Image Version
(1) Not applicable on iX TxA and iX TxC.
System tags are indicated by blue color in the tag list.
System tags are added by clicking the Add Tag/Add System Tag button in the tags
configuration page.
4.5
Array Tags
An array tag is a tag containing multiple values.
If the array size is >1, the tag is considered as an array tag.
Note:
Array tags are only supported by controllers which use addresses that can be
numerically increased.
4.5.1
Array Tag Set Up
Clicking the Add button adds a tag to the list. Make settings for each added tag.
When predefined values are available, these can be selected by clicking the arrow at
the right of the table cell.
Clicking the Data Type cell in the Controller column brings up the data type
configuration page. An array tag is configured by setting the array size to a value
>1.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
93
Tags
Data type
Description
Data Type
Selection of presentation format.
Size
Set the array size.
Array Size
If the array size is >1, the tag is considered as an array tag.
Limitation
When using controllers with named variables and accessing individual bits
with the syntax VariableName.BitNo, array tags of data type BOOL with bit
addressing, are only supported for 16-bits tags.
Related information
Tags
Chart Object
Data Exchange
4.6
Cross Reference
The Cross Reference tool provides an overview of where a specific tag is used in
the current project.
All occurrences of the tag in the current project are listed. Double-clicking on an
occurrence in the list automatically brings you to the object or function where
the tag is used.
The cross reference tool can be accessed by clicking the cross reference button on
the Tags tab or on the View ribbon. It can also be accessed from the context menu.
4.7
Triggers
Triggers are used to determine when data exchange is to be performed; based on
tag or a certain interval.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
94
Tags
Parameter
Description
Name
Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric
string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).
Tag
Selection of a tag, which when changed to a value other
than 0, triggers data exchange
Time
Time interval between data exchange operations in the
format HH:MM:SS
4.8
Poll Groups
Poll groups allow grouping tags for polling at 5 different intervals. The groups
defined on the Poll Groups tab are available for selection from the Tags tab after
checking the Others box.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
95
Tags
Parameter
Description
Name
Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric
string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).
Interval
Polling interval in ms
4.9
Station Handling
For some controllers, it is possible for the operator to define from which controller
station to read or write values. The station number is given as a prefix to the
controller address.
The station number for each controller is defined on the Controllers tab of the
Tags configuration page, by clicking the Settings button.
The default station is set on the Settings tab, and the stations are defined on the
Stations tab.
In this example, from an Ethernet driver, Station 0 is the default station.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
96
Tags
The default station is the station addressed without using a prefix. The other
stations can be addressed either as a fixed number or as an index register. With
fixed station numbers, an object is always connected to the same controller
address, and only the value of this controller address can be used in the object.
When addressing for example D10 in station 2, the following syntax is used:
2:D10
Related information
Using Index Registers for Station Handling
4.10 Index Registers
With index addressing, it is possible for the operator to select from which tag an
object is to collect the shown value. Without index addressing an object is always
connected to the same controller address, and only the value of this address can
be shown in the object.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
97
Tags
Which tags to use for indexing are defined on the Index Registers tab of the tags
configuration page. Up to eight different index registers can be used for each
controller, and each index register can be used for more than one object. Index
registers can be connected to any tag in the global tag list, but the tag has to be
selected for each controller.
Tags are connected to index registers on the Tags tab.
In general index addressing can be formulated as:
Display value = the content in tag (the object’s address + the content in the index
register)
If the content in the index register is 2, and the address of the tag specified in the
object is 100, the value shown in the object will be collected from address 102.
If the value in the index register is changed to 3, the value in the object will be
collected from address 103 instead.
4.10.1
Index Addressing Example
Using index registers may be convenient when for example controlling torque and
speed of a number of connected motors from the same screen, without having to
configure and display maneuverable objects for each motor.
The following example is based upon the presumption of three motors, and the
torque and speed of each motor is held in a different tag:
Motor 1
Torque
D11
Motor 2
Speed
D21
Torque
D12
Motor 3
Speed
D22
Torque
D13
Speed
D23
1. Create a project where the Demo Controller is selected as controller.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
98
Tags
2. Add tags and labels and connect them to Demo Controller tags according to
below:
3. Select the Index Registers tab and connect Index 1 to the MotorIndex tag
(D0).
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
99
Tags
4. Select the Tags tab again and check the Others box in order to display the
Index Registers column.
5. Connect the Torque and Speed tags to Index Register 1.
6. Now, create a ComboBox object for selection of motor, and two analog
numeric objects that will display (or set) the Torque and Speed tags for each
motor. Also add explaining labels.
7. Click Configure Texts for the ComboBox object, connect the object to the
MotorIndex tag, and add three texts and values according to below.
8. Connect the analog numeric objects to the Torque and Speed tags.
9. In order to test that the index addressing works even though no controller is
connected, add maneuverable objects, e.g. sliders, and connect them to the
D11–D13 and D21–D23 tags.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
100
Tags
10. Run the project, enter values for the objects connected to D11–D13 and
D21–D23, and select the different motors using the ComboBox.
4.10.2
Using Index Registers for Station
Handling
For some controllers, it is possible for the operator to define from which controller
station to read or write values. The station number is given as a prefix to the
controller address.
This is stated either as a fixed number or as an index register. The default station is
the station addressed without using a prefix. The other stations can be addressed
either as a fixed number or as an index register. With fixed station numbers, an
object is always connected to the same controller address, and only the value of this
controller address can be used in the object.
Index addressing reduces the number of tags needed as well as the number of
objects to be configured in the iX Developer project when showing values from /
writing to multiple controller stations.
The syntax when using index registers for station handling is for example I1:D10.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
101
Tags
This means that the value in the controller address connected to Index 1 will point
out which controller station number to read or write values.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
102
Tags
Related information
Station Handling
4.11 Expressions
The Expressions functionality is used when connecting an object to a tag and
the purpose is not to use the tag value as it is. Expressions enable the user to e.g.
extract a bit from a tag, add a dynamic offset or gain, and then to use this value for
a specific object.
Note:
Static offset and gain for a tag is set in the tags configuration page.
The same expression can be connected to more than one object in the project.
4.11.1
Definition
An expression is a one line return statement in C#. The default expression code is
“value”.
4.11.2
Using Expressions
Right-click on an object and then click the button ... next to Select Tag. The
Expressions dialog is displayed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
103
Tags
Click New to create an expression and expression group (optional). Existing
expressions are available from the Select Expression drop-down menu. Use the
Edit and Delete buttons to edit or delete existing expressions.
Select among the tags, operators and functions to insert. It is also possible to
type the expression manually, but without assistance from IntelliSense (auto
completion). If an expression is not valid, an error message is given when
validating the project. The expression is run, when the value of the original tag
that is connected to the object is changed.
Expressions added to an object in a project are available only in the current project.
If an object with a local expression is saved into the Component Library, the object
can be used in an other project, but the expression is not included. In order to reuse
expressions, they have to be saved in the expressions library.
Related information
Library Expressions
4.11.3
Library Expressions
Examples of expressions (how to extract bits from an int) are included when
installing iX Developer and can be added to the project by clicking Load.
Expressions can be reused in other projects by saving them in the expression
library. Select the expression in the drop-down list and click Save. The expression
is saved to a file in the PC. To load the expression in another project, click Load. A
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
104
Tags
selection dialog is displayed. Select the expression in the drop-down list and click
OK.
If you have saved expressions to the library that you want to remove, click Delete
and select among the saved expressions in a dialog. Expressions included when
installing iX Developer are not listed, since these cannot be deleted.
4.11.4
Limitations
An expression is executed only on read, i.e. when the value is changed in the
controller.
When writing a value (from e.g. an analog numeric tag), the expression is not
executed.
If another tag than the original tag is used in the expression, the expression is not
triggered on its value change.
If an expression that is used in more than one location is either renamed or deleted,
references are not updated. A build error is given.
Expressions can be used for all data connections except for
•
actions
•
the Property grid
•
recipe item tags
•
current language tag in Multiple languages configuration
•
trigger tags
•
index tags
•
scheduler tags
•
dynamic text for alarm items
Expressions use explicit bool comparison.
Example:
Do not use: value; Globals.Tags.Tag1.Value
Use: value != 0; GlobalsTags.Tag1.Vaule == 1
4.12 Data Exchange
Data exchange between different controllers is supported; also between controllers
of different brands. The data exchange can be performed when a digital tag is set,
or at a certain time interval. Data exchange can be selected for individual tags,
array tags or for the complete range of tags.
Note:
The data exchange function is isolated from general tag/controller settings. For
example, a tag assigned read access only for the operator, may still be read and written
by the data exchange function.
Follow the steps below to set up data exchange with three different controllers
involved:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
105
Tags
1. Select the Controllers tab of the tags configuration page and enter short
names for the controllers in the ID column, and make sure that all controllers
are active.
2. Select the Tags tab and check Data Exchange to display the Direction and
When columns.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
106
Tags
3. Select an address that is represented in all of the controllers.
If an array tag is selected, the complete address range corresponding to the
array size will be exchanged:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
107
Tags
4. Click ... in the Direction column to set up the direction of the data exchange.
5. Add a trigger tag on the Triggers tab with time interval for data exchange
or use a tag, which when greater than 0, will trigger the data exchange.
Alternatively, set up a trigger that includes both value change and a time
interval.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
108
Tags
6. Return to the Tags tab and select which trigger to use.
Note:
If the poll group contains many tag values that change frequently, the time required
for them to be handled could exceed the set poll time. This could lead to problems
updating the data exchange between the controllers. Set the Poll Group Interval to a
higher value or use a time trigger to control the data exchange operations.
Related information
Triggers
4.13 Importing and Exporting Tags
Tags can be imported to and exported from an iX Developer project, to, for
example, be edited in Excel or a text editor, or to be transferred to another project.
The complete tag list may be imported and exported, or the actions can be based
on connected controllers.
The import function also allows selecting individual tags for import.
4.13.1
Handling Columns
The import function allows skipping columns, or binding columns in the import
file to any column in the Tags configuration page.
The Name and DataType columns must always be bound.
A column may only be bound once.
4.13.2
Saving the Import Configuration
For repetitive import actions the import configuration, e.g. how columns are
bound and from which row to start the import, can be saved and reused. The
import configuration is saved by clicking the Save mapping as import module
button prior to performing the import. Next time the Import Tags dialog is
opened, the configuration is available from the Import module drop-down list.
Saving import configurations is valid only for files in text or Excel format.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
109
Tags
Note:
In order to import or export .xls-files Microsoft Excel must be installed.
4.13.3
Tag Import Example
If the controller in the project is changed to a system with other names for the tags
used, these must be changed:
1. Click on Tags in the Project Explorer.
2. Click on the arrow to the right of the Import/Export button to display the
available options of import and export operations.
3. Select Export tags from the desired controller to export the list to a text file or
an Excel sheet. Enter a file name and browse to a location. Define how the
to separate the columns and which columns to export. Use the arrows if you
want to change position of the columns.
Note:
In order to import or export .xls-files Microsoft Excel must be installed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
110
Tags
4. Click Export.
5. Open the text file in a text editor or a spread sheet application.
6. Change all current tags to corresponding tags used in the new controller, and
save the file.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
111
Tags
7.
Select Import tags to the desired controller and browse to the updated
file. If desired, select a row from which to start the import. It is possible to
rebind columns before importing to the project, and to exclude columns.
These settings can be saved by clicking the Save mapping as import module
button, and will then be made available for selection from the Import module
drop-down list at next import.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
112
Tags
8. Click Import. It is now possible to deselect import of some tags.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
113
Tags
9. In case there are name conflicts, these can be handled by changing the name,
overwriting, merging or skipping conflicting items. The actions taken are
saved to a log file for future reference.
Note:
If you select Overwrite, all settings for the existing tag will be overwritten. If you
select Merge, existing actions for the tag will be kept.
The imported tags are now added to the current project.
Related information
Basic Settings
4.13.4
Importing Tags from the Command
Line
Tags can also be added to the current iX Developer project using a command line
switch, by entering the following:
[Executable file] “Project location]\[Project name].neoproj”/ImportTags=”[Tag file
location]\Tag file”
In this case, no application window is displayed, as long as the import is successful.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
114
Tags
Example in Windows XP
To open the project named Test1 with the tag file VarFile.txt in the directory
C:\MyProjects, run iX Developer from the command line with the following
arguments:
NeoIDE.exe “C:\MyProjects\Test1\Test1.neoproj” /ImportTags=“C:\MyProjects\VarFile.txt”
In Windows Vista, the complete path (within quotes) to the executable file has to
be included.
Removing Existing Controller Tags at Import
The /ImportTags command line switch may be used together with the switch
/RemoveTagsNotInFile. This will remove all existing tags in the controller that are
not included in the import file.
4.14 Filtering Tags
A selection of tags can be displayed using the Filter Builder. Several conditions can
be used, and the different values/operators that can be used for making conditions
are displayed when clicking on the condition building blocks.
Operands and operator nodes are context sensitive. Name strings are not case
sensitive. Values in the filter builder are saved individually for each function
during an edit session. A filter is built as a logical expression tree. A filter typically
has operations on individual column values as leaf nodes and logical operators
serve as main nodes.
Perform the following steps to create a filter:
1. Click on Tags in the Project Explorer.
The tag list is displayed in the desktop area.
2. Select Show Selection from the Show Selection/Show All button to build a
filter.
It is also possible to filter tags depending on tag name by typing in the Filter box.
The filtering affects the tags list directly as letters are entered in the box.
Only tags including “te” in their names are displayed
The filter indication when having entered “te” in the Filter box
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
115
Tags
Related information
Filtering Items
4.15 Tag Format
The following tag formats (data types) are available in the dialog for a tag, provided
that the selected driver or OPC server supports the tag format.
Format
Data type
Range
DEFAULT
Treated as INT16
Bit
BIT
0 and 1
Bit
BOOL
Values can be “false” (0) or “true” (1)(1)
Signed 16-bit
INT16
-32,768 – +32,767
Unsigned 16-bit
UINT16
0 – +65,535
Signed 32-bit
INT32
-2,147,483,648 – +2,147,483,647(2)
Unsigned 32-bit
UINT32
0– +4,294,967,295(2)
Float with
exponent,
64-bit
DOUBLE
1.7 × 10308 (1)
Float with
exponent,
32-bit
FLOAT
±3.4 × 1038 (1)
7 × Signed 16-bit
DATETIME
An Analog Numeric object can present the time
format(1)
Syntax(3): <yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss> 7 consecutive
registers are used to store a time:
Dx, seconds, 0–59
Dx+1, minutes, 0–59
Dx+2, hours, 0–23
Dx+3, day, 1–31
Dx+4, month, 1–12
Dx+5, year, 100–9999
Dx+6, weekday, 1–7
String
STRING
Storing character strings in tags. For this data type,
size can be selected.
(1)Controller representation for this type is dependent on the driver software.
(2)Regarding resolution of values in 32-bit format:
both iX Developer and the operator
panel can handle up to six decimal digits of an integer 32-bit value. Remaining digits
will be truncated or changed into zeros.
(3)yyyy=year, MM=month, dd=date, hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=second.
For use in script code, the following table shows the type representation in C#.
This is used when there is a need to do a type casting, for example in calculations
that are using overloaded operators.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
116
Tags
C# type
Data type
Description
–
DEFAULT
Treated as INT16
uint
BIT
C# does not have a “bit” type. In the controller this
is a bit.
bool
BOOL
C# bool type that can have the values “false” (0)
and “true” (1)
int
INT16
16 bit, -32,768 – +32,767
uint
UINT16
16 bit, 0–+65,535
int
INT32
32 bit, -2,147,483,648 – +2,147,483,647
uint
UINT32
32 bit, 0 – +4,294,967,295
float
FLOAT
32 bit, ±3.4 × 1038
double
DOUBLE
64 bit, ±1.7 × 10308
DateTime
DATETIME
7 elements are used to store a time
string
STRING
Storing character strings in tags
Related information
Script
4.16 Aliases
An alias should be treated as a property of a screen and can act as a stand-in for a
tag. The alias can be used to reference a tag wherever that tag can be referenced
directly. When used, iX Developer will act the same as if the original tag had been
used. Each screen using aliases can be configured with a different instance different
tag references.
Using aliases will enable reuse of screens without having to create a new duplicated
screen.
4.16.1
Creating Aliases
Aliases are handled by clicking Aliases on the desktop view mode tab.
Desktop view mode tabs
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
117
Tags
Clicking the Add button adds an alias to the list. Make settings for each added
alias. When predefined values are available, these can be selected by clicking the
arrow at the right of the table cell.
Basic Settings
Enter Alias name and Default value for the alias. If no default value is entered, the
alias will be treated as a local screen variable.
Parameter
Description
Alias Name
Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string,
beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).
Default Value
Selection of tags to create aliases of. If no tag is selected
the alias will be treated as a local screen variable.
The default value will be the default value for the alias in
the created instances. It will also be the reference for the
default instance. See Instances.
Data Type
Selection of data type. This setting is enabled by first
clicking the Data Type checkbox.
The data type will by default reflect the data type of the
selected Default Value.
4.16.2
Instances
The aliases created in the project are presented in a table on the instances tab. It
is possible to change the value for the aliases in this tab, in order to override the
default value configured in the aliases tab.
If a value for an alias is changed in the instances tab, the new value is displayed with
bold text to indicate that it differs from the alias’ default value.
To revert back to the default value, delete the value followed by pressing [Enter].
The default value can be changed in the aliases tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
118
Tags
Parameter
Description
Instance
Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric string,
beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).
Aliases
The names of all aliases created in the project will be
displayed in the columns headers. The values connected
to the aliases will be listed in each columns.
Using the “Show Screen” Action with Instances
The "Show Screen” action can be used to display a specific screen. For screens
that have aliases, it is also possible to select which instance of the screen to use, and
thereby also which set of tags to assign to the screen’s aliases.
The Default option is a virtual instance configured with the alias’ default values.
“Show Screen” Action Parameters.
Related information
Action Groups
Limitations
•
•
•
•
•
Aliases do not support array tags.
Aliases can not be used in connection with expressions.
Aliases can not be used with the Trend Viewer object.
Aliases can not be used on background screens.
No scripting support for value changed event on an alias.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
119
Controller
5
Controller
iX panels can be connected to many types of automation equipment, such as
PLCs, servos, and drives.
The expression controller is used as a general term for the connected equipment.
It is possible to connect a tag to more than one controller simultaneously.
This makes it possible to use the same application with different controllers.
Controllers can be enabled and disabled in runtime. A project can contain
multiple controller connections.
A project can also be connected to an external OPC server.
Related information
Multiple Controllers
External OPC Server
Internal Tags
5.1
Adding a Controller
When a new project is created, one of the steps is to choose which controller brand
and model to connect to. Clicking on Tags in the Project Explorer, selecting the
Controller tab displays the Controller configuration page.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
120
Controller
Parameter
Description
Name
Symbolic name. The name can be any alphanumeric
string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z).
ID
Optional short name for controller; displayed in functions
such as Data exchange.
Active
Selection of which controllers are to be active in runtime.
Change of active controllers can also be performed in
runtime using an action or script.
Controllers are added and deleted using the Add and Delete buttons.
Clicking Controller allows selecting another controller, and Settings displays
settings for the selected driver.
Clicking Help in the driver settings dialog opens the help file for the driver.
Related information
Select Controller
5.1.1
Notify Window
If a communication error between the application and the controller is detected
in runtime, this will result in a communication error, and a Notify Window will
be displayed in the operator panel. The Notify Window is a floating window that
starts in the upper left corner of the screen. It is also used to display the alarm
indicator.
The Notify Window can be moved to any position on the current screen.
5.2
DEMO Controller
The DEMO controller is used and selected in the same way as a regular controller
driver, to design and test a project directly on the development PC without
connection to an external controller.
A number of predefined tags can be selected:
Data type
Tag ID
Description
BIT, BOOL
M0 - M99
Digital tags
INT16, UINT16
D0 - D99
Analog tags
The DEMO controller also includes counters and digital tags with predefined
functions:
Data type
Tag ID
BIT
M100 - M104
INT16
C0 - C4
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Description
Toggles OFF and ON every 1,000 ms
Counts from 0 to 100 with 1,000 ms interval
by default; min/max values can be defined
121
Controller
5.3
External OPC Server
OPC is an industrial standard created in a collaboration of automation hardware
and software suppliers. The standard defines methods for exchanging real-time
automation data between PC-based clients using Microsoft operating systems.
An OPC server acts as a controller towards an operator panel.
5.3.1
OPC Classic Client
Settings for the OPC Classic client is made in the Choose Controller dialog.
Select Localhost when accessing an OPC server running in your local PC.
Select Remote Server when accessing an OPC server in the network environment,
and click Browse to select the OPC server. Clicking Refresh makes it possible to
select the OPC server from the OPC Server drop-down list next time.
Add OPC server tags by clicking the small arrow at the right-hand side of the Add
button on the Tags tab:
To validate tags from a remote OPC server in the iX Developer project, return to
the Controllers tab and select the remote OPC server once more, and click OK.
This procedure is necessary as the tags in the remote OPC server may have been
changed since they were selected on the Tags tab.
5.3.2
OPC UA Client
Settings for the OPC UA client can be made in the Choose Controller dialog.
Open the dialog by clicking the Add button on the Controllers tab.
Enter the URL to the OPC UA server.
Controller Settings Dialog
The settings dialog for the OPC UA Server is available by clicking the Settings
button on the Controllers tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
122
Controller
Parameter
URL
Description
Enter URL to the OPC UA server.
Only UA TCP Binary is supported which means the URL must
start with “opc.tcp://”
Authentication
settings
Choose whether to use anonymous login or enter a user
name and password to enable a secured login.
Namespace settings
This setting offers a possibility to declare a namespace URI
and bind it to a prefix.
Tag View settings
Namespace separator character: Enter a character to be
used to separate the namespace URI prefix from the tag ID
when presented on the tag tab.
Default namespace: Select the default namespace URI
prefix to be used when entering a tag on the tag tab.
Subscription settings
Max subscriptions: Enter the maximum number of
subscriptions supported by the server(1)
Max items per subscription: Enter the maximum number
of items per subscription supported by the server(1)
(1) Please refer to the server manual for limitations
Add Tags from OPC UA Server
Add OPC UA server tags by clicking the Add button on the Tags tab.
Enter the Tag ID along with the preferred namespace URI prefix, defined in the
controller settings dialog. Make sure to separate the values with the separator
character.
Example: “NS3:tag” .
The Tag ID, in the example above, corresponds with BrowseName in the OPC
UA server.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
123
Controller
If no namespace URI prefix is entered, the default namespace URI prefix as
defined in the controller settings dialog will be used.
No prefix is needed when connecting to an iX server.
Note:
Array tags are not supported by OPC UA controllers.
Supported Functions
Data Access (UA part 8) is supported.
All variables of data types that are used in iX Developer is supported. Read / write
of objects, structs and arrays is not supported.
Limitations
Limitation
Description
Browsing
Browsing of servers / nodes is not supported.
Address input in GUI
NameSpace and BrowseName is used to identify a
variable in the server.
If this combination is not unique, the client cannot identify
the variable.
This is not a problem when connecting to an iX server, since
all tag names (variables) are unique.
Related information
OPC UA Server
5.4
Updating Drivers
Drivers can be updated via Internet or from file.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
124
Controller
Each driver takes up approximately 500 kB. To use the downloaded drivers, iX
Developer must be restarted.
5.4.1
Updating Drivers from Internet
A web browser is not required to update drivers via an Internet connection. A list
of drivers that can be downloaded via Internet is displayed when the connection
is established.
1. Click on the iX Developer button and select Update Drivers /From Internet
to update available drivers to the latest version, or to install new drivers.
The list shows the version number for the available drivers and the version
number for the installed drivers.
2. Select the driver(s) to install in iX Developer.
The command Mark Newer selects all drivers available in newer versions than
the ones installed, including all drivers that are not installed.
3. Click Download.
Related information
File Menu
5.4.2
Updating Drivers from File
When updating drivers from file only one driver at the time is updated. This can
for example be used to revert to an older driver.
To install a new driver from file:
1. Click on the top left button and select Update Drivers /From File to update
available drivers to the latest version.
2. Browse to the folder where the driver files are located.
A list of all drivers that can be installed is now shown.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
125
Controller
3. Select the driver to install in iX Developer.
Mark Newer selects the driver when there is a newer version than the currently
installed.
4. Click Install.
Related information
File Menu
5.5
Synchronizing the Controller Clock
In order to synchronize the controller clock with the iX Developer project, the
system tags hour, minute, second, need to be added to the project from the Tags
configuration page. These are then connected to addresses in the controller.
When the value is changed in any of the system tags, they will be written to the
controller.
Related information
System Tags
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
126
Web Server
6
Web Server
The Web Server adds the possibility to use a server-side Application Programming
Interface (API) to interact with a running project. The API operates over the
HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and can be accessed from any compatible
device. In addition, the web server can host web pages and related media to be
consumed by web browsers.
The bundled Javascript Software Development Kit (SDK) makes it easy to build
interactive web pages that utilize the API.
Login settings for the web server are available from Server group on the System
ribbon tab.
6.1
6.1.1
Web Server Configuration
Web Site Configuration
For the web server to be able to host web pages, the content of the web site must
be transferred using FTP to a folder named “WebSite” residing in the FTP root
directory.
The FTP server must be enabled and the web content can only be transferred after
the application has been deployed and started on the panel.
6.1.2
Login Form
The web server provides a default login form that is used for clients to
authenticate. It is also possible to override the default and provide a custom web
page that matches your overall design.
To override the login form, create an HTML file called “login.html” and place it in
a folder named “Website” in the root of the FTP root directory.
This file will be used instead of the default when clients access the address “/login”.
The Javascript SDK provides tools for creating the form using a few conventions.
Note that this only applies if you have authentication enabled in the web server
settings.
Authentication Script
Reference the authentication script
Username and Password Field
Mark the username and password field with the predefined id’s “ix-username“
and “ix-password”:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
127
Web Server
Login Button
Mark a login button with the predefined id “ix-login”. Any element can be used.
Invalid Credentials
Optionally add an element with the predefined id “ix-invalid-credentials” that
will be shown if the login fails.
6.2
6.2.1
Javascript SDK
Javascript SDK Overview
The JavaScript SDK provides a rich set of client-side functionality for accessing
the server-side API calls. This enables the possibility to build highly interactive
web pages that uses tags defined in the project.
1. The first step to build an interactive web page is to reference the SDK by
inserting the following script into to the header of the html.
Note:
The SDK is bundled with jQuery 1.7 (http://jquery.com/).
2. Next, the SDK needs to be initialized. In its simples form the following lines
need to be added after the reference to the SDK:
This will make it possible to use the defined tag metadata attributes to incorporate
the project tags into the web page.
The following line will, for example, insert the value of Tag1 into the HTML
document:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
128
Web Server
Tag Value or Properties
To insert the current value of a tag or tag property into a HTML element, the
data-ix-tag attribute can be used. The value of the attribute should be the name
of the tag as defined in the project and the property of a tag. Separate the names
with a dot “.”.
If no property is provided, the value of the tag is used.
Formatting
Formatting of a tag value can be applied to a tag of numeric type or a datetime. The
format is defined using the data-ix-format attribute.
The following table describes the custom date and time format specifiers and
displays a result string produced by each format specifier.
Tuesday, February 07, 2012 12:27:24 PM is used as input.
Tag value
Description
Result
d
The day of the month, from 01 through 31.
07
D
The abbreviated name of the day of the week (in
english)
Tue
j
The day of the month, from 1 through 31
l
The full name of the day of the week
S
Ordinal number for the date of the month (eg -st, -nd,
-rd, -th etc)
th
w
Day of the week as a number.
2
z
Day of the year
37
W
Week of the year
05
F
The full name of the month.
m
Gets the day of the month from 00 to 31
02
M
The abbreviated name of the month.
Feb
n
The month of the year 1 to 12
2
t
Number of days in the month
29
L
Is leap year, 1 if true, otherwise 0
1
Y
The year as a four-digit number.
2012
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
7
Tuesday
February
129
Web Server
Tag value
Description
Result
y
The year, from 00 to 99
12
a
The AM/PM designator lower case.
pm
A
The AM/PM designator upper case.
PM
g
The hour, using a 12-hour clock from 1 to 12.
12
G
The hour, using a 24-hour clock from 0 to 23.
12
h
The hour, using a 12-hour clock from 01 to 12.
12
H
The hour, using a 24-hour clock from 00 to 23.
12
i
The minute, from 00 through 59
27
s
The second, from 00 through 59.
24
X
The milliseconds, from 000 through 999.
000
O
Hours offset from GMT, with a leading zero for a
single-digit value.
+0100
Z
Timezone offset, in seconds
3600
q
Quarter
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
1
130
Web Server
The following table describes the custom numeric format specifiers and displays
sample output produced by each format specifier:
Tag
Value
0
Result
Description
Value
Digit
Format
4
00 → 04
4.5
0.00 → 4.50
.1
0.00 × 1000 → 1.00 × 10-01
#
Digit, zero shows as absent
4
## → 4
.
Decimal separator or monetary
decimal separator
4.5
0.00 → 4.50
E
Separates mantissa and exponent
in scientific notation
5.55
0.0 × 1000 → 5.6 × 1000
1000000
0.0 × 1000 → 1.0 × 1006
Grouping separator
1000
0,0 → 1,000
1000
0,# → 1,000
-5
plus;minus → minus
5
plus;minus → plus
0
plus;minus;zero → zero
-5
0;(0.0);0.000 → (5.0)
700
[>500]###.##;[<1000]###;#
##.# → 700.00
400
[>500]medium;[>1000]###
;###.# → 400
1001
[>2000]high;[>1000]normal;[>500]low → normal
,
;
[]
Separates positive and negative
subpatterns
Custom subpatterns
Setting Tag Value
To set the value of a tag, two elements must be defined.
The first element have the data-ix-setter attribute on the position where the tag
value can be entered.
The second element has the data-ix-submitbutton attribute used to submit the
new tag value.
The data-ix-submitbutton attribute takes the tag names, separated by comma
“,”, to be submitted when the button is clicked. To submit all tags an asterisk “*”
can be used.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
131
Web Server
iX-invalid Style
Basic validation is done on input values. If the value cannot be assigned to the Tag
then the value will not be set. To indicate an invalid value the framework will set
the CSS class “ix-invalid” on the element. This can then be used to provide the
user with visual cues of the invalid state. For example, the following CSS snippet
adds a red border around the input when the input is incorrect:
Refresh Modes
To control how tag values are refreshed, the data-ix-refresh attribute can be used
with elements defined with data-ix-tag or data-ix-setter.
It is recommended to use the least frequent interval that is required by your
project.
Advanced
iX.setup
After loading the JavaScript SDK, call iX.setup to initialize the framework. This
will wire the tag metadata attributes that you have defined in HTML and will start
periodical polling if this is needed.
Parameters:
Name
options
Type
Object
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Description
See the “Options” table below.
132
Web Server
Options
Property
Type
Description
Argument
Default
refreshInterval Int
The refresh interval of tag values
in ms. For performance reasons
it is recommended not to use low
values for this setting.
Optional
5000
refreshMode
Overrides the default refresh
mode of tag values.
Optional
onetime
Optional
onetime
String
Accepted modes are: none,
onetime, interval.
refreshModeSetter
String
Overrides the default refresh
mode of tag setters.
Accepted modes are: none,
onetime, interval.
Example:
This example will set periodical refresh interval to 10 seconds, set the refresh mode
of HTML elements marked with the data-ix-tag attribute to interval and set the
refresh mode of HTML elements marked with the data-ix-setter attribute to
refresh only once.
iX.refreshElements
Refreshes the tag values of the provided elements manually. The attribute
data-ix-refreshbutton can be used to achieve the same function.
Note:
Only an element that have been marked with a valid data-ix-tag or data-ix-setter can
be refreshed. The value will be refreshed regardless of the refresh mode set on the
element.
Parameters:
Name
elementIds
Type
Array
Description
A list of strings containing the HTML element
ids. If not provided all tag elements are
updated.
Example:
This example show how you programmatically can achieve the same behavior
as marking an element with data-ix-refreshbutton. In the example, the
HTML element with id "tag1Id" will be updated when the element with id
"refreshButton" is clicked. This example uses jQuery (bundled with iX.js) to bind
to the click event of the "refreshButton"
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
133
Web Server
In HTML:
In Javascript:
iX.refreshTags
Refreshes the tag values of the provided tag names manually.
Note:
Only tags used in conjunction with data-ix-tag or data-ix-setter or created by
iX.createTag can be refreshed.
Parameters:
Name
tagName
Type
String
Description
(Optional) A list of strings containing the
names of the tags to refresh. If not provided
all defined tags are refreshed.
Example:
This example show how to programmatically refresh the tag values of "tag1" and
"tag2". When refreshButton is clicked the "tag1" and "tag2" will be refreshed even
if the refresh mode was set to 'none' when creating the tag.
iX.createTag
Creates a representation of a server-side tag on the client-side.
Parameters:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
134
Web Server
Name
Type
Description
tagName
String
The name of the tag in the project to
create a connection to.
valueRefreshedCallback
Function
Optional: Function that is called when
the tag value has changed. The function
is not called when the tag value is the
same as last checked.
Function may take two optional
parameters. The first parameter is
the tag that changed the value, the
second the old values of the tag before it
changed.
refreshMode
String
Optional: Overrides the default refresh
mode of tag. Accepted modes are: none,
onetime, interval.
Note that the more frequent
refreshMode is always used. For
example, if the tag is created with
onetime but an element defines
data-ix-refreshmode=”interval” for
the same tag then the tag will have a
refreshMode of interval.
Returns:
Type
iX.Tag
Description
An instance of iX.Tag. See Tag Class for a complete description.
Example:
This example show how to display a warning if the value of "tag1" exceeds 70. The
example is using jQuery (bundled with iX.js) to hide and show the warning box.
iX.getTag
Retrieves a tag by name.
Parameters:
Name
tagName
Type
String
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Description
The name of the tag to retrieve.
135
Web Server
Returns:
Type
iX.Tag
Description
An instance of iX.Tag. See Tag Class for a complete description.
Example:
This example shows how to retrieve an instance of a tag after it has been created.
"tag1" and "tag1Again" will refer to the same tag instance.
iX.commitTagValue
Commits any unsaved tag values that was changed using iX.Tag.setValue for the
provided tag names.
Parameters:
Name
tagNames
Type
Array
Description
(Optional) A list of strings containing the
names of the tags to commit. If not provided
all defined tags are committed.
Example:
This example show how to commit changes to tag values on the server in a batch.
Note that the value must match the data type of the tag on the server.
Tag Class
iX.Tag is a class representing a Tag. The methods and properties of a Tag must
be accessed through an instance of iX.Tag and not the class itself. Typically a Tag
instance obtained using iX.createTag or iX.getTag methods.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
136
Web Server
iX.Tag Properties
Name
Type
Description
isDirty
Bool
Flag indicating if the local value has been
changed.
tagProperties
Object
An object with data retrieved from the server.
See tag metadata below. Note that these are
only available after the first refresh. Also, only
value is refreshed not all of the metadata.
value
Flexible
The value of the tag. The type of the value
depends on the data type in the project. Never
use this property to set the value.
Tag Properties:
Name
Type
Description
controllers
Array
An array of controller names that the tag is
connected to.
description
String
The tag description, null if not defined.
dataType
String
The tag dataType, e.g int16, datetime,
default
initialValue
Flexible
The initial value of the tag, null if not defined.
readonly
Bool
True if the tag is read only, otherwise false
quality
String
Indicates the quality of the tag value:
Unknown, Good, Bad
iX.Tag.setValue
Set the tag value manually. To commit the value to the server side call iX.commit.
It’s vital that the value that is set corresponds to the data type of the tag.
Parameter:
Name
newValue
Type
Flexible
Description
The new value. Must match the data type of
the tag.
iX.Tag.subscribeToChange
Adds a callback that is called when the server-side value has changed.
Parameter:
Name
fn
Type
Function
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Description
The callback to register
137
Web Server
iX.Tag.unsubscribeToChange
Unsubscribe from changes.
Name
Type
fn
Function
Description
The same callback that was used with
iX.Tag.subscribeToChange
iX.Tag.refresh
Refreshes this tag. It is recommended to refresh tags in batch (using iX.refresh)
instead of refreshing individual tags.
iX.Tag.commit
Commit this tags value if the value has been changed. It is recommended to
commit tags in batch (using iX.commit) instead of refreshing individual tags.
6.3
Web Service API
6.3.1
RESTful Web Service API
iX Developer provides an API for interacting with tags. The tags can be read or
written to using the HTTP verbs GET, PUT and POST. GET to read tags, PUT
to set the value of a tag or POST to perform batch operation.
6.3.2
General
Accepted Types
It is possible to negotiate which media type that will be returned as a representation
of the resource being retrieved. Use the Accept header in the request to specify the
desired media type. text/html and application/json media types are understood as
response formats for tag related resources.
A client request providing an unsupported media type will be responded with the
following message: “406 - Not understood”.
6.3.3
REST API
Tags Resource
Lists tags available in the project.
Tags Resource
Verbs:
GET
Uri:
/Tags
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
138
Web Server
Tags Resource Example
Tag Resource
Resource for interacting with individual tags. To perform multiple operations on
tags it is recommended to use TagBatch resource instead.
Tag Resource
Verbs:
GET, PUT
Uri:
/tags/:name
GET params:
Name: The name of the tag, e.g., Tag1 SystemTagDateTime
PUT params:
Name: The name of the tag, e.g., Tag1 SystemTagDateTime
Value: The value to set the tag to, e.g., 12, "foo"
Tag Resource Example
TagBatch Resource
The TagBatch resource is a resource used to perform batch operations on tags.
TagBatch Resource
Verbs:
POST
Uri:
/tagbatch
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
139
Web Server
TagBatch Resource
POST params:
includeMetadata: boolean indicating if only the tag value or the
full tag metadata should be fetched
getTags: List of tag names to return
setTags: List name, value pairs representing new tag values.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
140
Web Server
TagBatch Resource Example
Note:
The returned value (initialValue) for tags of datetime type is presented in the ISO8601
format.
Example: "2008-09-22T14:01:54.9571247Z".
Dates are always returned in UTC, Coordinated Universal Time.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
141
Objects
7
Objects
Static and dynamic objects that can be included in screens are available for
selection from the Objects control group of the Home ribbon tab.
Not all objects are visible in the normal view, but are made available by scrolling.
Clicking the expand button displays all the objects, categorized into groups.
An object can be created by clicking on it in the Objects group and then clicking
on the screen, or by dragging it from the Objects group and dropping it on the
screen. This creates the object with default size and appearance.
Dragging the object handles resizes it. Object appearance can be modified using
the commands in the Format and Font control groups, but also by the controls
on the Dynamics ribbon tab.
Settings for a selected object can be managed with the control groups on the
General ribbon tab, and actions can be configured from the Actions ribbon tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
142
Objects
An object style that is to be used frequently can be saved as an Object Variation, in
order to immediately apply a predefined appearance to the object when creating it.
Related information
Object Variations
7.1
Blinking Objects
Some objects can be displayed as blinking objects. Blinking is enabled for each
object individually using the Property Grid.
The Blink settings can be entered either from the General group under the
Dynamics tab, or from the Property Grid, under Animations. In both cases
selecting Blink opens the Edit Blink Dynamics dialog.
Parameter
Blink Interval
Description
Constant blink intervals:
Time in ms from when the object gets invisible one
time until it gets invisible the next time. For operator
panel projects, the minimum value is 400 ms, and it is
recommended to use a blink interval of a multiple of 400
ms to ensure a harmonic blink experience (400 ms, 800 ms,
1200 ms, 1600 ms etc.). For PC targets, the minimum value
is 200 ms. The default value is 1200 ms for all targets, and
the maximum value is 10,000 ms for all targets.
Blink intervals bound to a tag:
Select Tag for Blink Interval changes blink frequency
based on the selected tag value.
Blink Enabled
Select Tag for Blink Enable makes it possible to enable and
disable blinking depending on the selected tag value:
When the tag value is equal to the given value (=True),
blink is enabled. When the tag value is not equal to the
given value (=False), blink is disabled.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
143
Objects
Security has higher priority than blink, and an object hidden by security cannot
be made visible through blink.
It is not recommend to use Blink on objects that should be used for user
interaction.
Related information
General Group
7.1.1
Limitations for operator panel
Targets
Blink is not supported for the following objects in operator panel targets:
Alarm Distributor
Viewer
Alarm Viewer
Audit Trail Viewer
Check Box
Combo Box
Database Viewer
Group Box
List Box
Media Player
Pdf Viewer
Progress Bar
Radio Button
Web Browser
-
Related information
General Group
7.2
Shapes
Static shapes such as Line, Rectangle and Poly Line can be used to draw
background graphics. Tags can be linked to shapes under Dynamics, to change
their appearance (e.g. color and position) depending on value changes of
controller tags.
Points for an existing Poly Line object can be adjusted by selecting Edit Points
from the context menu.
Ellipse
Line
Polyline
Rectangle
Note:
Bevel for Poly Line and Ellipse is only supported for projects designed for PC targets.
7.3
HMI Controls
Dynamic objects such as buttons, analog numerics, sliders, meters and trend
viewers are linked to tags in order to create control and monitoring functions.
The tag associated with an object can be selected and changed from the
Tag/Security group on the Home or General ribbon tabs, or from the context
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
144
Objects
menu. Links to tags (controller tags, internal tags or system tags) are selected in
the Tag drop-down list.
Objects containing text can be edited directly from the keyboard, either when just
created, or when a single selection is done on the text area of the object.
It is also possible to use script code to control the text contents of buttons, texts
or text boxes.
Note:
Use of braces around digits, such as ‘{0}’, is not allowed in text objects. This will result
in an error when opening the screen.
The following HMI controls are described:
Action Menu
Object
Alarm Viewer
Object
Analog Numeric
Object
Animated GIF
Animated Label
Object
Audit Trail Viewer
Button Object
Circular Meter
Object
Chart Object
Database Viewer
Object
Digital Clock
Object
Linear Meter
Object
Multi Picture
Object
Picture Object
Roller Panel
Object
Slider Object
Text Object
Touch Combo Box
Object
Touch List Box
Object
Trend Viewer
Object
7.3.1
Action Menu Object
The Action menu object is used to display multiple menu groups, each containing
its own sets of actions which can be triggered in iX Runtime from the action menu
object.
Settings for the Action Menu object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
145
Objects
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Edit Actions
Opens the Edit Actions dialog
View type
Choose between Bar, Expand and Tab
Item Width
Set the width of the items. This is only available for the Bar
and Expand View types.
Item Height
Set the height of the items
Orientation
Set the orientation of the items. This is only available for
the Bar View type.
Picture Width
Set the width of the pictures for the items
Picture Height
Set the height of the pictures for the items
ScrollBar Width
Set the width of the scroll bar.
Touch Settings Group
Parameter
Scroll Sensitivity
Description
Set the sensitivity of the scroll. Minimum value is 1,
maximum value is 10.
Edit Actions Dialog
The Actions tab in the Edit Actions dialog contains the following properties:
Parameter
Description
Text
The text to be displayed for the item
Picture
The picture to be displayed for the item
Make Transparent
Set transparency on the item
Action
Configure the action when the item is clicked
The Menu Groups tab in the Edit Actions dialog contains the following
properties:
Parameter
Description
Menu Group Name
The name of the menu group
Picture
The picture to be displayed for the menu group
Make Transparent
Set transparency on the menu group
Note:
Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panel.
Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn
out unclear.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
146
Objects
Adding a New Action
In the Edit Actions dialog select the Actions tab. Click the Add button. A new
item will be added and placed last in the list. To configure the actions for the item,
click the “…” button in the Action column.
Adding a New Menu Group
In the Edit Actions dialog select the Menu Groups tab. Click the Add button. A
new menu group will be added and placed last in the list. The menu group will be
displayed in the Actions tab as a new menu group tab.
Action Menu Dynamics
It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Action Menu
properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.
Related information
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
7.3.2
Alarm Viewer Object
The Alarm Viewer is used to display and manage alarm items, for example
indication of out-of-bounds tag values. The viewer consists of a list area and a
button area.
Related information
Alarm Management
Alarm Viewer
7.3.3
Analog Numeric Object
The Analog Numeric object displays a box with a numeric or alphanumeric value.
The value can be connected to a tag.
Settings for the analog numeric object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Display Format Group
Parameter
Description
Type
Selection of Integer, Decimal, String, Hex or Binary display
format
Number of Decimals
Maximum number of decimals to display in the object.
Only available when Type = Decimal. The number of
decimals will be represented by a “#” symbol on the analog
numeric object.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
147
Objects
Parameter
Description
Limit Characters to
Makes it possible to maximize the number of displayed
characters. The number of characters will be represented
by a “#” symbol on the analog numeric object.
Zero Fill
Fills empty character positions with zeros, to let the
maximum number of characters always be displayed
Note:
The “Limit Characters to” function, in combination with the string format type is
not supported for the Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese and Simplified Chinese
(Compact) languages.
Prefix/Suffix Group
Parameter
Prefix/Suffix
Description
Text value that will precede/follow the object value
Tag/Security Group
Parameter
Description
Select Tag
Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page
Select Security Groups
Allows limiting access of the object based on security
groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by
anyone.
Select Visibility
Configuration of visibility:
Default: The visibility specified on the General tab of the
Security Manager is used.
Disabled: The object is disabled for users with insufficient
access rights
Hidden: The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights
Normal: The object looks normal also for users with
insufficient access rights
Format Group
Parameter
Description
Auto Stretch Font
Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Default
setting for the analog numeric object.
Disable Operator Input
Disables input in runtime
Transparent
Makes the object transparent, i.e. makes the frame and
background color invisible
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
148
Objects
Text Alignment Group
Parameter
Description
Horizontal / Vertical
Adjusts the object horizontally or vertically
Validation Group
Parameter
Description
On Input
Input values are validated, based on Lower Limit and
Upper Limit, when the box is checked
On Display
Background color changes according to Other Colors on the
Format tab if upper or lower limit are violated, when the
box is checked
Lower Limit/Upper
Limit
Minimum/maximum value that can be entered in
runtime when On Input is checked, or that will change
the background color of the object when On Display is
checked
Note:
The font size of the analog numeric object is auto-sized when resizing the object frame
by default, and is not adjusted in the Font control of the Home ribbon tab. Uncheck
Auto Stretch Font in the Text group first, and then change the font size on the Home
ribbon tab.
7.3.4
Animated GIF
The Animated GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) object allows including
a moving graphic picture in the iX Developer project. Animated GIFs can
be imported to the project by browsing the PC environment for graphic
files. Imported animated GIFs are added to the Project Picture folder in the
Component Library.
The Animated GIF can be connected to a tag which controls animation. When
the value of the connected tag is 0, then animation is turned off and the picture is
displayed static in its initial design. An Animated GIF not connected to a tag runs
animated continuously.
Settings for the Animated GIF object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Change Picture
Opens a browse dialog for selection of picture
Reset Picture
Restores original height and width to picture
Stretch
Adapts height and width to the selection frame when
resizing the picture
Transparent
Makes the object transparent, i.e. makes the frame and
background color invisible
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
149
Objects
Note:
Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panel.
Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn
out unclear.
Tag/Security Group
Parameter
Description
Select Tag
Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page
Select Security Groups
Allows limiting access of the object based on security
groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by
anyone.
Select Visibility
Configuration of visibility:
Default: The visibility specified on the General tab of the
Security Manager is used.
Disabled: The object is disabled for users with insufficient
access rights
Hidden: The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights
Normal: The object looks normal also for users with
insufficient access rights
7.3.5
Animated Label Object
The Animated Label object is used to display an animated text label in
iX Runtime.
Settings for the Animated Label object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Note:
Using the animated label object creates a slightly higher load on the CPU.
Parameter
Description
Text
The text to be displayed in the animated label
Animated
If enabled, the text starts to animate
Animation speed
Set the speed for the animation. Minimum value is 1,
maximum value is 32,767.
Animation Direction
Set the animation direction:
From right to left
From left to right
From right to left to right
From left to right to left
From down to up
From up to down
From down to up to down
From up to down to up
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
150
Objects
Animated Label Dynamics
It is possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Animated Label
properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.
Related information
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
7.3.6
Audit Trail Viewer Object
The Audit Trail Viewer displays information about operator changes that have
been logged with the audit trail function.
Related information
Audit Trail
Audit Trail Viewer
7.3.7
Button Object
The Button tool draws a button with a text and/or picture. The button can be
configured to perform a specific task in runtime via the Actions ribbon tab or using
script. The text on the button object can also be set to depend directly on a tag
value using the General control on the Dynamics ribbon tab. If a picture is used,
the picture file is added to the Project Pictures folder in the Component Library.
Settings for the button object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Picture Group
Parameter
Picture
Description
Selects a picture to display on the button. Pictures from
the Project Pictures folder is available for selection
directly. It is also possible to browse the PC environment
for a picture.
Select No Picture to remove a previously selected picture.
Checking the Multi Picture checkbox will make
it possible to display different pictures based on
the value of a connected tag according to section
Configure Multi Pictures.
Multi Picture
Multi Picture or single picture displayed on button.
Transparent
Makes the picture transparent
Note:
Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panel.
Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn
out unclear.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
151
Objects
Configure Multi Pictures
Different pictures can be displayed on the button based on the value of a
connected tag, following the steps below:
1. Check the Multi Picture checkbox.
2. Click on the Picture control on the Picture group of the General tab.
3. Select a tag to control which picture to display.
4. Click Add to add pictures and configure start and end values for each picture.
You can browse the PC for pictures, or select pictures from the current project.
5. Click OK.
The picture on the button will now change according to the value of the
selected tag. When the value is out of limits, no picture is displayed.
Picture Alignment Group
Parameter
Vertical Alignment/
Horizontal Alignment
Description
Set alignment for the picture
Clicking the small arrow in the lower right corner of the Picture Alignment group
displays the picture properties with a number of additional picture settings.
Style Group
Parameter
Description
Style
Predefined graphical styles for the button
Appearance
The appearance of the button, including possibility to
make the button rounded and settings for each corner of
the button.
Additional predefined styles for this object are found in the Object Variations
group.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
152
Objects
Note:
When editing default button style properties, for example corner radius, appearance
in runtime may sometimes differ from when designing the project in iX Developer.
Related information
Object Variations
Text Group
Parameter
Description
Text
Text displayed on the button
Multiline
Lets the text run over more than one line, using [Enter].
Confirm the text entry by pressing [Ctrl] + [Enter].
Word Wrap
Wraps the text to fit the width of the button
Configure Texts
Links the displayed text to a tag. The Text field value is
shown if the selected tag is not within the set limits
Text Alignment Group
Parameter
Horizontal / Vertical
Description
Adjusts the text on the button horizontally or vertically
Visibility Group
Parameter
Transparent
Description
Makes the object transparent
Creating a Button with Momentary Function
In order to create a button with a momentary function, you need to combine a Set
Tag action for Mouse Down with a Reset Tag action for Mouse Up .
Related information
Actions Ribbon Tab
Script
Component Library
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
153
Objects
7.3.8
Circular Meter Object
The Circular Meter represents a numeric value, and displays the value of a
connected tag.
Different styles can be used to change the graphical profile of the meter, and also if
the meter is to be full, half or quarter.
Circular meters in Black Full style, Chrome Half style and Vintage Quarter style
Settings for the meter object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Angular Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Start Angle / End Angle
Determines the placement of the scale on the meter.
The angular value is based on a start (0 degrees) at three
o’clock, in a counter clockwise direction from there. The
Start Angle must differ from the End Angle.
Text Rotation
Select Parallel to let the numbers follow the outline
of the meter, or None to display the numbers aligned
horizontally.
Clockwise
Determines rotation orientation, clockwise or counter
clockwise.
Region Settings Group
Parameter
Low Region / Medium
Region / High Region
Min/Max
Description
Define colors for up to 3 regions, and at which values to
start and stop each region. Entering 0 for both minimum
and maximum values displays no region color.
Value Scale Group
Parameter
Min Value / Max Value
Description
Start/end value of scale.
These values can consist of one decimal digit.
Major Ticks
Number of labeled scale marks on the meter
Minor Ticks
Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
154
Objects
Style Group
Parameter
Description
Style
Predefined graphical styles for the meter. The smaller
styles are intended in particular to allow full visibility in
the smaller operator panels.
Appearance
The appearance of the meter; full, half or quarter
Additional predefined styles for this object are found in the Object Variations
group.
Related information
Object Variations
Needle Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Analog Animation
Animation that creates a smooth movement of the needle
at value change.
Oscillation
Animation of needle initially oscillating around the new
value. The function is only available in combination with
Analog Animation.
When Analog Animation is selected, it is possible to activate Shortest Path in the
property grid under Appearance. The setting affects the direction of the animated
needle, resulting in a counter clockwise movement if this is the shortest path
between two indicated values.
Note:
The Shortest Path property is not available for PC targets.
Note:
Using animation on the circular meter objects creates a higher load on the CPU.
Therefore it is recommended to limit the use of the needle animation to only a few
circular meters per screen, especially for the smaller panel models.
Tag/Security Group
Parameter
Description
Select Tag
Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page
Select Security Groups
Allows limiting access of the object based on security
groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by
anyone.
Select Visibility
Configuration of visibility:
Default: The visibility specified on the General tab of the
Security Manager is used.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
155
Objects
Parameter
Description
Disabled: The object is disabled for users with insufficient
access rights
Hidden: The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights
Normal: The object looks normal also for users with
insufficient access rights
Visibility Group
Parameter
Description
Transparent
Makes the object transparent
Scale
When unchecked, the scale color of the meter is made
transparent. Scale color is set from Other Colors on the
Format tab.
7.3.9
Chart Object
The chart object is used to display values of connected array tags.
Settings for the chart object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Chart Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Edit Series
Add, remove and edit the current series for this chart
Chart Types
Choose chart type. Available types are:
Area
Area Horizontal
Bar
Bar Join
Donut
Histogram
Kagi
Line
Line Fast
Line Horizontal
Line Point
Pie
Points
Radar
Header
Set the name that is displayed above the chart
3D View
Set a 3D look and feel for the chart
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
156
Objects
X Axis Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Visible
Set the visibility of the X axis
Grid Visible
Set the visibility of the X axis grid lines.
Automatic
Automatically calculates the minimum and maximum
X axis values. Overrides the Minimum and Maximum
properties
Minimum
Set the minimum value of the X axis. If automatic is set,
this value is ignored
Maximum
Set the maximum value of the X axis. If automatic is set,
this value is ignored
Y1 Axis Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Visible
Set the visibility of the Y1 axis
Grid Visible
Set the visibility of the Y1 axis grid lines.
Automatic
Automatically calculates the minimum and maximum
Y1 axis values. Overrides the Minimum and Maximum
properties.
Minimum
Set the minimum value of the Y1 axis. If automatic is set,
this value is ignored.
Maximum
Set the maximum value of the Y1 axis. If automatic is set,
this value is ignored. When using charts with visible labels
on curves the maximum value is extended to make room
for label.
Y2 Axis Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Visible
Set the visibility of the Y2 axis
Grid Visible
Set the visibility of the Y2 axis grid lines.
Automatic
Automatically calculates the minimum and maximum
Y2 axis values. Overrides the Minimum and Maximum
properties.
Minimum
Set the minimum value of the Y2 axis. If automatic is set,
this value is ignored.
Maximum
Set the maximum value of the Y2 axis. If automatic is set,
this value is ignored. When using charts with visible labels
on curves the maximum value is extended to make room
for label.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
157
Objects
Style Group
Parameter
Description
Style
Set the style of the chart
Visibility Group
Parameter
Description
Scale
Set the visibility of the scale
Transparent
Make the chart transparent
Header
Set the header visibility
Legend
Set the legend visibility
The Edit Series Dialog
Clicking the Edit Series control in the Chart Settings Group will open the Edit
Series Dialog. The Edit Series Dialog contains the following settings:
Parameter
Description
Name
The name of the Series, as shown in the legend in the chart.
X Tag
The X Tag values.
The tag must be an array tag.
The number of elements shown will be the lowest common
denominator of the X Tag array size and the Y Tag array size.
Y Tag
Optional: The Y Tag values for the chart.
The tag must be an array tag.
If this value is not chosen, the X Tag Values will still be visible and
the Y Axis will be set automatically. The number of elements
shown will be the lowest common denominator of the X Tag array
size and the Y Tag array size.
Size
Optional: The number of elements in the tag arrays. This property
overrides the sizes of the X Tag array size and Y Tag array size. If
this value is not set, the lowest common denominator of the X
Tags array size and the Y Tags array size will be chosen as size.
Labels
Set a label for each point in the chart. There is one label for each
available tag value.
Color
Choose the color of the series.
Thickness
Set the thickness of the series. This applies for the chart types
Line, Line Fast, Line Horizontal and Line Point.
Axis Type
Select the Y Axis that this series will use.
Note:
Chart objects with large arrays where values are frequently changing may affect
performance.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
158
Objects
Related information
Array Tags
7.3.10
Database Viewer Object
The Database Viewer can be used to display database contents in runtime.
For operator panel projects, only databases included in the current project are
available. For PC targets, it is possible to access databases from anywhere in the
network environment.
Settings for the database viewer object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Show Controls
When the box is checked, the user is able to select
database and database table in runtime
Database
Path to database to be loaded automatically in runtime(1)
Table Name
The table in the selected database to be loaded
automatically in runtime(1)
Browse Data Table
Opens a browse dialog for selection of database and
database table in design time. The path and table name
will be added to the Database and Table Name fields.
(1) If the entered database or table does not exist or is not valid, an empty database
viewer is displayed in runtime.
Note:
Simulation of the object on the development PC is supported only for PC targets.
Related information
Database
7.3.11
Digital Clock Object
The digital clock displays date, time and/or day of week.
The time zone is selected on the System ribbon tab and is transferred to the target
when the project is downloaded to it. If no time zone is selected, the time zone that
has been selected for the panel or PC will be retained.
The date and time display format (for example using AM/PM for time) is based
on the operating system settings. For operator panel projects, this format may be
altered by selecting another region on the System ribbon tab.
Note:
For PC projects the region settings need to be changed in the system account to take
place.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
159
Objects
Related information
Date, Time, and Region Group
Display Format Group
Parameter
Description
DateAndTime / Date / Time
Selection of date and time components
Show Day of Week
When checked, day of week is displayed
Show Seconds
When checked, seconds are displayed
7.3.12
Linear Meter Object
The Linear Meter represents a numeric value, and displays the value of a connected
tag.
Different styles can be used to change the graphical profile of the meter, and also if
the meter is to be horizontal or vertical.
Linear meters in Classic Horizontal style and Eclipse Vertical style
Settings for the meter object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Value Scale Group
Parameter
Min Value / Max Value
Description
Start/end value of scale
These values can consist of one decimal digit.
Major Ticks
Number of labeled scale marks on the meter
Minor Ticks
Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
160
Objects
Style Group
Parameter
Description
Style
Predefined graphical styles for the meter. The smaller
styles are intended in particular to allow full visibility in
the smaller operator panels.
Appearance
The appearance of the meter; horizontal or vertical
Tag/Security Group
Parameter
Description
Select Tag
Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page
Select Security Groups
Allows limiting access of the object based on security
groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by
anyone.
Select Visibility
Configuration of visibility:
Default: The visibility specified on the General tab of the
Security Manager is used.
Disabled: The object is disabled for users with insufficient
access rights
Hidden: The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights
Normal: The object looks normal also for users with
insufficient access rights
Visibility Group
Parameter
Description
Transparent
Makes the object transparent; only indicator bar and scale
will be visible
Scale
When unchecked, the scale color of the meter is made
transparent. Scale color and indicator color are set from
Other Colors on the Format tab.
7.3.13
Multi Picture Object
The Multi Picture object allows using a set of pictures as an object. The pictures
change in runtime depending on intervals of a tag value.
Pictures can be imported to the project by browsing the hard disk for graphic files.
Imported pictures are added to the Project Pictures folder in the Component
Library.
Settings for the Multi Picture object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
161
Objects
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Configure Pictures
Configuration of start/end values of intervals and
selection of pictures for each interval. Pictures can be
selected from the Project Pictures folder or from the hard
disk. Transparency can also be set. Original picture size is
displayed. The Add/Delete buttons are used to add and
remove items to/from the object.
Reset Picture
Restores original height and width to picture.
Stretch
Adapts height and width to the selection frame when
resizing the picture.
Lock Aspect Ratio
Maintains the height/width ratio of the object.
Note:
Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panel.
Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn
out unclear.
Related information
Component Library
7.3.14
Picture Object
The Picture object allows using a picture as an object. Pictures can be imported to
the project by browsing the PC environment for graphic files. Imported pictures
are added to the Project Pictures folder in the Component Library.
The displayed picture can also be dynamic; depending of a set of pictures that have
been linked to intervals in a tag value.
Settings for the picture object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Change Picture
Opens a browse dialog for selection of picture
Reset Picture
Restores original height and width to picture
Stretch
Adapts height and width to the selection frame when
resizing the picture
Transparent
Makes the object transparent, i.e. makes the frame and
background color invisible
Note:
Make sure not to use semi-transparent pictures in projects targeted for operator panel.
Since these targets do not fully support opacity, semi-transparent pictures may turn
out unclear.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
162
Objects
Related information
Component Library
7.3.15
Roller Panel Object
The Roller Panel object is used to display predefined texts for certain tag values.
Settings for the Roller Panel object are available from the General ribbon tab while
the object is selected:
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Title
Set the title for the Roller Panel
Title Visible
Determines if the title is visible or not
Loop Scroll
Determines if the values will loop around or not
Disable Operator Input
Determines if the Roller Panel is editable or not
Touch Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Scroll Sensitivity
Set the sensitivity of the scroll
Scroll Friction
Set the friction of the scroll
Text Group
Parameter
Configure Texts
Description
Opens the Configure Texts dialog
Configure Text Dialog
The Configure Texts dialog contains the following properties:
Parameter
Description
Text
The text to be displayed for the item
Start Value
The starting value for when this item should be selected
End Value
The ending value for when this item should be selected
Roller Panel Dynamics
It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Roller Panel
properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.
Related information
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
163
Objects
7.3.16
Slider Object
The Slider can be used to adjust a numeric value. The slider sets a value to a
connected tag. If the tag value changes for other reasons, the slider control handle
will show the actual value in runtime.
Sliders in Chrome and Eclipse Horizontal styles, and Vintage Vertical style
Settings for the slider object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Value Scale Group
Parameter
Min Value/Max Value
Description
Start/end value of scale
These values can consist of one decimal digit.
Major Ticks
Number of labeled scale marks on the slider
Minor Ticks
Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks
Style Group
Parameter
Description
Style
Predefined graphical styles for the slider. The smaller
styles are intended in particular to allow full visibility in
the smaller operator panels.
Appearance
The appearance of the slider; horizontal or vertical
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
164
Objects
Tag/Security Group
Parameter
Description
Select Tag
Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page
Select Security Groups
Allows limiting access of the object based on security
groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by
anyone.
Select Visibility
Configuration of visibility:
Default: The visibility specified on the General tab of the
Security Manager is used.
Disabled: The object is disabled for users with insufficient
access rights
Hidden: The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights
Normal: The object looks normal also for users with
insufficient access rights
Visibility Group
Parameter
Description
Transparent
Makes the object transparent
Scale
When unchecked, the scale color of the slider is made
transparent. Scale color and indicator color (color of the
handle) are set from Other Colors on the Format tab.
7.3.17
Text Object
The Text object is used to display read-only information for the operator. The
displayed text can be static, or linked to intervals in a tag value that contain
different strings. The text object can also be set to depend directly on a tag value
using the General control on the Dynamics ribbon tab.
Settings for the text object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Text Group
Parameter
Description
Text
Text that the object displays
Multiline
Lets the text run over more than one line, using [Enter].
Confirm the text entry by pressing [Ctrl] + [Enter].
Word Wrap
Wraps the text to fit the width of the object. Not available
if Autosize is selected.
Configure Texts
Links the displayed text to a tag. The Text field value is
shown if the selected tag is not within the set limits.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
165
Objects
Parameter
Description
Auto Stretch Font
Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Not
available if Autosize is selected.
Auto Size
Resizes the object according to the size of the default text
string length and font size. Default setting for the text
object.
Text Alignment Group
Parameter
Description
Horizontal / Vertical
7.3.18
Adjusts the text in the object horizontally or vertically.
Not available if Autosize is selected.
Touch Combo Box Object
The Touch Combo Box object is used to create text selections from a drop-down
list.
Settings for the Touch Combo Box object are available from the General ribbon
tab while the object is selected:
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Auto Size Item Height
The Touch Combo Box will ignore the Item Height value and
size the values automatically
Item Height
Set the height of the individual items in the Touch Combo
Box
ArrowBox Width
Set the width of the Arrow Box
ScrollBar Width
Set the width of the scroll bar
Text Group
Parameter
Configure Texts
Description
Opens the Configure Texts dialog
Configure Text Dialog
The Configure Texts dialog contains the following properties:
Parameter
Description
Text
The text to be displayed for the item
Start Value
The starting value for when this item should be selected
End Value
The ending value for when this item should be selected
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
166
Objects
Touch Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Scroll Sensitivity
Set the sensitivity of the scrolling
Touch Combo Box Dynamics
It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Touch Combo
Box properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.
Related information
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
7.3.19
Touch List Box Object
The Touch List Box object is used to handle a list of predefined texts.
Settings for the Touch List Box object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the object is selected:
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Separator Visible
Show or hide a separator between the items in the Touch
List Box
Item Height
Set the height of the individual items in the Touch List Box
ScrollBar Width
Set the width of the scroll bar
Touch Settings Group
Parameter
Scroll Sensitivity
Description
Set the sensitivity of the scrolling
Text Group
Parameter
Configure Texts
Description
Opens the Configure Texts dialog
Configure Texts Dialog
The Configure Texts dialog contains the following properties:
Parameter
Description
Text
The text to be displayed for the item
Start Value
The starting value for when this item should be selected
End Value
The ending value for when this item should be selected
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
167
Objects
Touch List Box dynamics
It is also possible to set dynamics, i.e. tag dependent values for the Touch List Box
properties. These can be found in the Dynamics tab in the ribbon bar.
Related information
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
7.3.20
Trend Viewer Object
Trend viewers are used to display values of connected tags. Trend viewer curves
represent tag values over time. A trend viewer object can show any number of
trend viewer curves.
Note:
A large number of trend viewer pens and short sampling intervals may affect
communication performance.
Related information
Trend Viewer
Curves Group
Communication Performance
7.4
Media Controls
The media controls are used to display media files, pdf files and web pages in
runtime. The following media controls are described:
Media Player Object
7.4.1
PDF Viewer Object
Web Browser Object
Media Player Object
Media files can be added to the media player object, which allows selecting,
starting and stopping the files in runtime. For operator panels, files in .mpeg1 and
.wmv format are supported. The files are added to the Component Library.
Note:
Windows Media Player 10 or later is required.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
168
Objects
Browse Folders Group
Parameter
Description
Project Files
Default option for browsing. The project files are listed
in the Component Library. At least one of the folders has
to be chosen.
External Memory Card
Select this option for browsing if project files are placed on
an external memory card. At least one of the folders has
to be chosen.
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Media Source
Select a media file to add to the media player, from the
project files folder or by browsing the PC
Note:
The object is not supported on iX TxA targets. Simulation of the object on the
development PC is supported only for PC targets.
Note:
Connecting a tag to a Media Player Object will cause the media player to try to play a
media clip with a name that corresponds to the tag’s value, ignoring the configured
Media Source parameter.
Scripting to the Media Player Object
When scripting to the Media Player object, the name of the current media file has
to be stated, for example:
MediaPlayer1.Source = “Bear.wmv”;
Prior to running the script, the media file has to be added manually to the Project
Files folder. When the script is executed, the file will be copied to the output
directory.
Events for the media player can be used, for example:
MediaPlayer1.Play();
Related information
Component Library
7.4.2
PDF Viewer Object
PDF files can be displayed in runtime using the PDF viewer object. The added
files are available from the Component Library.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
169
Objects
Note:
Adobe Reader 9 or 9.5 is required.
Browse Folders Group
Parameter
Description
Project Files
Default option for browsing. The project files are listed
in the Component Library. At least one of the folders has
to be chosen.
External Memory Card
Select this option for browsing if project files are placed on
an external memory card. At least one of the folders has
to be chosen.
Settings Group
Parameter
Description
PDF File
Select a PDF file to add to the PDF viewer, from the project
files folder or by browsing the PC
Buttons
Select which buttons to make available in runtime
In an operator panel, all PDF files in the project files folder will be available for
selection in runtime, if the Open button is checked.
Note:
When using a PDF viewer object in a popup screen, only the default style for the popup
screen is supported.
Note:
The object is not supported on iX TxA targets. Simulation of the object on the
development PC is supported only for PC targets.
Related information
Component Library
Popup Screen
Adobe Reader not Recognized
7.4.3
Web Browser Object
Web pages can be displayed using the web browser. It is possible to set up the web
browser with regular web browsing functionality, with selection of web addresses
in a list or input via the virtual keyboard. It is also possible to allow showing certain
defined web pages only, or a local HTM/HTML file.
Note:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 or later is required.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
170
Objects
Settings Group
Settings for the Web Browser object are available from the General ribbon tab
while the Web Browser object is selected:
Parameter
Description
Address
The default web page of the web browser object.
Home
The web page that will be displayed when the Home button
is pressed.
Favorites
Addition of web pages that will be available for selection
from the drop-down address field in runtime.
Address Read Only
Checking the box disables entering text in the address field
Address Field
Unchecking the box removes the address field in runtime
Go Button
Unchecking the box removes the Go button in runtime
Home Button
Unchecking the box removes the Home button in runtime
Back Button/Forward
Buttons
Unchecking the box removes the navigation buttons in
runtime
Referring to a local HTM/HTML file can be useful for example when the operator
panel is not connected to Internet. The local file — a .HTM- or .HTML-file —
has to be located in the Project Files folder of the current project, and is addressed
in the following format: “File://filename.html” where “filename.html” represents
the actual file”, e.g. File://ReadMe.html.
Web Browser Limitations
The web browser object functionality is limited under some circumstances:
Function
Limitation description
Web browser
object
PC targets
operator panel targets
Supported
Not supported on iX TxA
targets
Popup
windows
Opening popup windows
from the web browser in
runtime
Not supported
Not supported
Web browser
in a popup
screen
Other styles than the
default style for the
popup screen
Not supported
Not supported
Simulation
of the web
browser
Simulation on the
development PC
Supported
Not supported
Support of
some web
pages
Access of some web
pages from within the
web browser.
Supported
May not be supported.
If the web browser
does not behave
as expected, it is
recommended to use
the standard Internet
Explorer, available in
the iX panel, instead.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
171
Objects
Function
Limitation description
PC targets
operator panel targets
The standard Internet
Explorer can be started
using the Run action
and executing the
iesample.exe file.
Related information
Popup Screen
7.5
Special Controls
The special controls are used to create attractive navigation facilities in runtime.
Navigation List Box Object
7.5.1
Screen Carousel Object
Navigation List Box Object
Screen navigation using the Navigation List Box object is performed via
thumbnails, and scripting can be used for advanced functionality.
Note:
The object is supported only for iX TxC and PC targets.
General Group
Parameter
Description
Orientation
Select horizontal or vertical orientation for runtime scrolling.
Scroll Tolerance
Defines tolerance of pressing the touch screen (or scrolling
with the cursor) slightly outside of a navigation list box item in
runtime before the navigation is actually carried out.
Item Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Configure Items
Definition of items included in the navigation list box object;
see below.
Height/Width
Size of the items in the navigation list box.
Margin
Margin between navigation list box items.
Border Width
Width of navigation list box item borders.
Corner Radius
Corner radius of navigation list box items.
Show Text
Selection of whether to show text below navigation list box
items.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
172
Objects
The individual items in the navigation list box object are handled by clicking
Configure Items. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add and remove items
to/from the navigation list box.
Parameter
Description
Picture
Selection of picture by browsing the PC environment or among
the project files.
Screen
Selection of screen to navigate to.
Script Info
Optional text to serve as a reminder if scripts are used.
Text
Text displayed under each navigation list box item.
Only visible if Show Text is checked under Item Settings.
Use the up and down arrows to facilitate reorganizing of navigation list box items.
Related information
Script
7.5.2
Screen Carousel Object
Screen navigation using the Screen Carousel object is performed via thumbnails
in a 3D view. The screen carousel can be configured to rotate automatically, or
actions can be configured to control screen carousel behavior.
Note:
The object is supported only for iX TxC and PC targets.
Note:
If the iX Developer system requirements for the graphic card are not fulfilled, the
visualization of the object will have limitations. Hardware acceleration is required.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
173
Objects
General Group
Parameter
Description
Number of Visible
Items
Maximum number of visible items.
Scroll Duration (ms)
Time used for an item to move to the next position in the
carousel.
Use Reflection
Adds a reflecting layout to the object.
Auto Scroll
Makes the object rotate automatically.
Item Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Configure Items
Definition of items included in the screen carousel object;
see below.
Height/Width
Size of the items in the screen carousel.
Margin
Margin between screen carousel items.
Border Width
Width of screen carousel item borders.
Corner Radius
Corner radius of screen carousel items.
Show Text
Selection of whether to show text below screen carousel
items.
The individual items in the screen carousel object are handled by clicking
Configure Items. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add and remove items
to/from the screen carousel.
Parameter
Description
Picture
Selection of picture by browsing the PC environment or
among the project files.
Screen
Selection of screen to navigate to.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
174
Objects
Parameter
Description
Script Info
Optional text to serve as a reminder if scripts are used.
Text
Text displayed under each screen carousel item.
Only visible if Show Text is checked under Item Settings.
Use the up and down arrows to facilitate reorganizing of screen carousel items.
Related information
Actions Ribbon Tab
7.6
Debug Tools
Debug tools are used for troubleshooting and monitoring.
Alarm Distributor Viewer Object
–
7.6.1
Alarm Distributor Viewer Object
The Alarm Distributor Viewer is a debug tool, used to display information from
the Alarm Distributor function.
Related information
Alarm Management
Alarm Distributor Viewer
7.7
Windows Controls
The following Windows controls are described:
Check Box Object
Combo Box Object
Progress Bar
Object
Radio Button
Object
7.7.1
Group Box Object
List Box Object
Text Box Object
–
Check Box Object
The Check Box object controls a digital tag value. The connected tag gets the
value 1 when the box is checked and the value 0 when the box is unchecked.
The appearance of the text can be adjusted in the Font group of the Home ribbon
tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
175
Objects
Note:
Changing font family is only supported for projects designed for iX TxC and PC targets.
Settings for the check box are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Text Group
Parameter
Text
Multiline
Description
Text that the object displays
Lets the text run over more than one line, using [Enter].
Confirm the text entry by pressing [Ctrl] + [Enter].
Word Wrap
Wraps the text to fit the width of the object. Not available if
Autosize is selected.
Auto Stretch Font
Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Not available
if Autosize is selected.
Auto Size
Resizes the object according to the size of the default text
string length and font size.
Text Alignment Group
Parameter
Horizontal /
Vertical
7.7.2
Description
Adjusts the text in the text box horizontally or vertically. Not
available if Autosize is selected.
Combo Box Object
A Combo Box can be used to create selections from a drop-down list. When a
keyboard is connected to the operator panel it is also possible to make selections
from the list by typing.
Settings for the combo box are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Text Group
Click Configure Texts to enter texts for different values.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
176
Objects
Select a tag, and then click Add until there are enough rows in the table. Enter texts
and start values.
It is also possible to use script code to control the contents of a combo box.
Example
The following script code relies on the existence of a combo box (ComboBox1)
and a set of predefined recipes (“Book” and “TV”).
When the screen opens, the script clears the box and writes the recipe name strings
in the box. Selection from the combo box triggers loading of a recipe.
Related information
Script
Recipe Management
7.7.3
Group Box Object
The Group Box is used to draw a labeled frame around a group of objects.
7.7.4
List Box Object
The List Box handles a list of predefined texts.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
177
Objects
Text Group
Click Configure Texts to enter texts for different values.
Select a tag, and then click Add until there are enough rows in the table. Enter texts
and start values.
It is also possible to use script code to control the contents of a list box.
Example
The following script code includes two objects on Screen1, a button (Button1)
and a list box (ListBox1).
When the button is clicked, the script is triggered and a string is written to the list
box and the value of an internal counter (count) is incremented.
Related information
Script
7.7.5
Progress Bar Object
The Progress Bar displays a meter without numeric scaling, representing an analog
value. The value can be connected to a tag.
The other properties, such as orientation, minimum and maximum values, and
meter color (foreground property) are set in the Property grid.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
178
Objects
Related information
Property Grid
7.7.6
Radio Button Object
A Radio Button controls the value of a connected digital tag.
The appearance of the text can be adjusted in the Font group of the Home ribbon
tab.
Settings for the radio button are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Text Group
Parameter
Description
Text
Text that the object displays
Multiline
Lets the text run over more than one line, using [Enter].
Confirm the text entry by pressing [Ctrl] + [Enter].
Word Wrap
Wraps the text to fit the width of the object. Not available
if Autosize is selected.
Auto Stretch Font
Resizes the font to fit the height of the object. Not available
if Autosize is selected.
Auto Size
Resizes the object according to the size of the default text
string length and font size.
Text Alignment Group
Parameter
Horizontal / Vertical
Description
Adjusts the radio button text horizontally or vertically. Not
available if Autosize is selected.
It is possible to use script code to make a group of radio buttons enable combined
control of a tag value. Exactly one of the radio buttons is active (set to 1) at any
time. The following example includes 3 radio buttons and a tag of int16 type.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
179
Objects
Radio buttons are grouped based on which screen they belong to.
Related information
Script
7.7.7
Text Box Object
The Text Box is used to include a box with multiple rows of text.
By default, the text can be modified when clicking on the box in runtime. The
entered text is not saved in runtime; when the screen changes the value will be
reset. The text box can also be configured as read-only.
Settings for the text box object are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
180
Objects
Text Group
Parameter
Description
Text
Text that the object displays
Multiline
Lets the text run over more than one line, using [Enter].
Confirm the text entry by pressing [Ctrl] + [Enter].
Word Wrap
Wraps the text to fit the width of the object
Read Only
Disables input in runtime
Text Alignment Group
Parameter
Horizontal /
Vertical
Description
Adjusts the radio button text horizontally or vertically
Visibility Group
Parameter
Transparent
7.8
Description
Makes the object transparent, i.e. everything but the text
will be invisible
Additional Controls
iX Developer allows using and creating third party controls in order to enhance
application functionality and additional customization. This section describes
different technologies and includes configuration examples. Sample projects are
available at the Beijer Electronics web site.
To understand and use all the information in this document, .Net development
skills are required.
Caution:
Beijer Electronics only offers support for the examples described in this chapter.
Related information
Referenced Assemblies
Error Related to Third Party Controls
7.8.1
Target Platform
Different technologies are used for third party controls depending on the target
platform for the iX Developer application. The target can be either PC or
Windows CE.
Windows CE has no support for vector graphic (WPF) and only uses .Net
Compact Framework which is a subset or the .Net Framework used on a PC.
Windows CE does not natively support GDI+, so GDI+ related functionality was
removed from .Net Compact Framework.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
181
Objects
PC Target
Two different technologies can be used for a PC target:
•
Standard Windows forms and GDI+
•
WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation)
WPF uses vector graphics, and the appearance of the control is described in
XAML. Since iX Developer is a WPF application, it is recommended to use
WPF when developing customized controls or user controls for a PC target.
Controls developed in WPF can bind to a tag value in iX Developer, in opposite to
Windows forms controls, that cannot be bound to tag values.
Windows CE Target
Windows CE only uses the .Net Compact Framework (a subset or the .Net
Framework used on a PC), and does not support vector graphics (WPF).
Windows CE does not natively support GDI+, so GDI+ related functionality was
removed from the .Net Compact Framework.
Limitations
Some of the limitations regarding third party controls are listed below:
•
Control Designers (a designer class that can extend design time support) are
currently not supported.
•
Type Converters in a separate design dll are not supported.
•
Complex property editing in the property grid is not supported. All complex
properties have to be set up in script.
•
.Net Compact Framework controls can include design dll and so called
AssmetaData dll to handle attributes that are not supported in Windows
CE. Currently this is not supported by iX Developer. Because of this, it is
important to always test the code on the target platform.
•
The Script Editor allows scripting against properties and methods that are not
supported in Windows CE. Because of this, it is important to always test the
code on the target platform.
7.8.2
Adding Controls to the iX Developer
Toolbox
Third party controls can be added to the Objects toolbox in iX Developer,
following the steps below:
Caution:
Beijer Electronics only offers limited support for thirdparty controls.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
182
Objects
1. Select the Objects group on the Home ribbon tab, and fully expand the
Objects toolbox by clicking the lower right arrow.
2. Click Add Control.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
183
Objects
3. Select controls to add among the default controls, or click Browse to add
customized controls.
4. Click OK.
The added controls are now available under Additional Controls in the Objects
toolbox.
7.8.3
Default Controls and Installed
Controls
Default controls include controls added by the user and the .Net 4 controls
installed with the .Net Framework.
Installed controls include all controls that are installed in the GAC (Global
Assembly Cache) on your computer.
Note:
Third party controls that are used in a project are not copied to the project folder. This
means that it is not possible to open a project with third party controls on another
development PC without installing the controls. But the application will work in
runtime on another target, since references are copied to the output folder when
building the project.
7.9
WPF Controls
WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation) uses vector graphics, and the
appearance of the control is described in XAML. Since iX Developer is a WPF
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
184
Objects
application, it is recommended to use WPF when developing customized controls
or user controls for a PC target. Controls developed in WPF can bind to a tag value
in iX Developer.
User controls and custom controls are supported in WPF.
7.9.1
WPF User Controls
A WPF user control can be described as a composition of different user interface
controls. Creating a WPF user control is similar to creating a window:
•
You have a XAML file and C# class file for a user control.
•
The class file extends the user control class, adding additional behavior and
properties.
•
The XAML file encapsulates the composing controls; styles, templates,
animations and whatever necessary for “Look & Feel”.
Since the WPF user control is a just composition, it is really easy to create. It does
not require a lot of WPF UI model knowledge.
7.9.2
WPF Custom Controls
WPF custom controls are more flexible, but are more complicated than a user
control, and require a profound understanding of the WPF user interface model.
•
A number of certain user interface controls, such as button, progress bar or
speedometer has to be extended.
•
The appearance of the custom control has to be defined in XAML, as the
custom control itself has no look.
Most of the controls in iX Developer are custom controls, which makes it possible
to restyle them to various different layouts without changing the code files; just the
XAML.
A rounded meter in different styles
7.9.3
Creating a WPF User Control with
Tag Connection
The following example describes how to create a WPF user control that can be
connected to a tag.
The complete code is included at the end of the example.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
185
Objects
1. Start Visual Studio to create a new project, and select WPF User Control
Library.
2. Add [DefaultProperty("Value")] to the class, to define which property the
tag should set when then value is set.
3. Add a dependency property with same name as the attribute above:
static readonly DependencyProperty ValueProperty;
4. Add a static constructor and register to the dependency property.
5. Create a Value property of type object.
6. Add a TextBox to the user control.
7. Set the name of your control.
8. Add a binding to the TextProperty and bind to the Value Property.
9. Remember to change ElementName to the name of your control.
10. Compile and test by adding the control to the iX Developer toolbox.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
186
Objects
Note:
When an update is made, the existing control must be updated under
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Beijer Electronics AB\iX Developer\Thirdparty\
Windows XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Beijer Electronics AB\iX
Developer\Thirdparty\
Example Code
7.9.4
Creating a Windows Forms User
Control for a PC Target
The following example describes how to create a Windows Forms user control
designated for a PC target.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
187
Objects
Note:
Windows Forms control objects are placed on top of WPF control objects in PC targets.
1. Start Visual Studio to create a new project, and select Windows Forms
Control Library.
2. Add a TextBox and a Button to the design surface.
3. Add Event Handler for Button click.
4. Add Event Handler for TextBox lost focus.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
188
Objects
5. Add a Value Property and INotifyPropertyChanged implementation:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
189
Objects
6. Use the following code to connect the control to a tag value in iX Developer:
The code shows how the value is set on the user control when the tag changes
its value, and how the tag value is changed when the user control changes its
value.
7.9.5
Creating a Windows Forms User
Control for a CE Target
The following example describes how to create a Windows Forms user control
designated for a CE target (a iX TxA or iX TxB operator panel).
Note:
Windows Forms control objects are placed on top of control objects created with the
iX Developer software.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
190
Objects
1. Start Visual Studio 2005 or 2008 to create a new Smart Device Project.
2. Select Windows CE for Target platform.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
191
Objects
3. Select Control Library.
4. Use the same code as in the Creating a Windows Forms User Control for a PC
Target example.
Note:
Always test your code on the target platform, as properties/methods currently not
supported may be included in the code. See Limitations for details.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
192
Ribbon Tabs
8
Ribbon Tabs
Each of the ribbon tabs holds a set of one or more groups. Each group holds a set of
one or more controls that are used to manage screens and functions in a project.
The behavior of the ribbon tabs can be configured to be context dependent using
the Options button in the File menu.
Double-click on any of the ribbon tab headings to collapse the ribbon area. A
double-click on a ribbon tab, when the ribbon is collapsed, brings back the original
style. This can also be changed from the context menu of the Quick Access
toolbar. Tooltips are displayed for all controls on the ribbon tabs. The tooltip
offers a brief description of the selected control.
iX Developer contains the following ribbon tabs:
Home Ribbon Tab
Project Ribbon Tab
System Ribbon Tab
Insert Ribbon Tab
View Ribbon Tab
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
General Ribbon Tab
Actions Ribbon Tab
Related information
Options
Quick Access Toolbar
8.1
Home Ribbon Tab
The Home ribbon tab contains groups of controls for editing screens in the
project:
Clipboard Group
Screen Group
Objects Group
Font Group
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
193
Ribbon Tabs
Format Group
Tag/Security Group
Name Group
8.1.1
Clipboard Group
The Clipboard group contains the paste, cut, copy and format painter controls.
Cut
Cuts the selection to the clipboard. Also available from the keyboard with
[Ctrl] + x or from the context menu.
Copy
Copies the selection to the clipboard. Also available from the keyboard with
[Ctrl] + c or from the context menu.
Paste
Copies the clipboard to the current screen. Also available from the keyboard with
[Ctrl] + v or from the context menu.
Note:
Text from a compatible source, e.g. clipboard text, will be converted to a Text Box
object when pasted into a screen.
Format Painter
The Format Painter control is used to copy formatting from one object to another.
This is useful when creating a uniform appearance for objects.
To apply formatting to another object:
1. Click on an object with the desired format and font properties. Click on the
Format Painter control. The mouse pointer changes to a paintbrush.
2. Click on the object to format.
The format properties from the first object is applied to the selected object.
Format and font properties can be copied between objects of different types, for
example from a rectangle to an HMI control.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
194
Ribbon Tabs
Note:
Modification to an object using the Other Colors control is not applied when using the
Format Painter.
Related information
Other Colors
8.1.2
Screen Group
The Screen control group contains the add screen, background screen, delete
screen and current language commands. Screens can also be added and deleted
from other controls, such as the Navigation Manager and the context menu of the
Project Explorer.
Add Screen
The Add Screen command creates a new empty screen that opens for editing.
Clicking the lower part of the Add Screen button shows a selection of screen
templates that are available for selection.
Delete Screen
The Delete Screen command removes the current screen from the project, and
also disconnects any associations from other screens to the removed screen.
Note:
A deleted screen cannot be restored with the Undo command.
Background Screen
Any screen can be used as background to the current screen.
All objects in a background screen will work as designed in the project application.
Objects in a background screen must be edited in the screen that they reside
in. Objects in a background screen will be dimmed in the current screen in the
development environment.
Current Language
Current language is the language that is being used at the particular moment that
the project is designed. If multiple languages are not used in the project, only
Default is available.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
195
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Screens
Language Management
8.1.3
Objects Group
The Objects control group contains static and dynamic objects that can be added
to a screen.
Related information
Objects
8.1.4
Object Variations
For many of the objects it is possible to apply a preset style, using the Object
Variations feature. For the Button object and the Circular Meter object there is a
large number of different styles available as default, whereas for most other objects
it is possible to save user-defined styles.
To display the Object Variations menu, click on one of the objects in the Objects
menu. The Object Variations menu appears to the right of the Objects menu,
provided that there are some styles available for the selected object.
To add user-defined styles in the Object Variations menu:
1. Select an object to start from.
2. Modify the object, using the tools under the Home ribbon tab or the Property
Grid.
3. Select the designed object and right-click to open the context menu.
4. Select Save Variations to save the modification.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
196
Ribbon Tabs
The new variation will appear in the Object Variations menu when clicking on the
object type it originated from.
Objects supporting Save Variation
Rectangle
Ellipse
Analog Numeric
Button
Text
Linear Meter
Slider
Circular Meter
Trend Viewer
Chart
Action Menu
Animated Label
Digital Clock
Alarm Viewer
-
-
The object properties are shown in the Property Grid. When saving the variation
the following properties are saved (when applicable):
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
197
Ribbon Tabs
Variations saved (where applicable)
Color
Font
Rotation
Size
Visibility
Security groups
required
Audit trail
description
Delay Mouse/
Touch Input
Visibility on access
denied
Opacity
Horizontal and
vertical alignment
Picture horizontal
and vertical
alignment
In addition to the general properties listed above, a number of object specific
properties are saved:
Object
Property
Action Menu Object
View type
Orientation
Alarm Viewer Object
Analog Numeric Object
Button position
Limit number of characters
Number of characters
Number of decimals
Prefix
Suffix
Animated Label Object
Animation direction
View type
Chart Object
Chart type
3D view
Show header
Show legend
Show scale
Digital Clock Object
Display format
Show seconds
Linear Meter Object
Orientation
Scale
Transparency
Slider Object
Orientation
Scale
Transparency
Text Object
Horizontal alignment
Vertical alignment
Trend Viewer Object
Major value ticks
Minor value ticks
Rectangle
Radius
Effects
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
198
Ribbon Tabs
Note:
Features only supported in PC environment might not work on other platforms.
Related information
Objects
8.1.5
Font Group
All fonts available in the development PC are available for selection when
designing the project. All fonts used in the project are included when downloading
the project to the target.
Note:
For PC and TxC non-standard fonts are not transferred or installed to the target. Install
non-standard fonts manually on the target.
Note:
The number of fonts needs to be considered when calculating the total size of a
project.
Note:
The default font Tahoma does not support Chinese characters in operator panel
projects in runtime. The font has to be changed to a font that supports Chinese
characters, e.g. MS Song. Keep in mind that some fonts require a lot of project memory.
The Font group is used to change text style. The text style is defined for the
currently selected object.
Font and Font Size
Select font from the drop-down list. Use the increase/decrease font size buttons or
set a specific font size.
Note:
Objects, for which Auto Stretch Font is selected, will not be affected by these
settings. The font size will be autosized when resizing the object height.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
199
Ribbon Tabs
Style and Color
An italic, underlined or bold style can be selected for the text. The style stays
regular if all the boxes are left unchecked. Use the Font Color drop-down list to
set the color of the text.
8.1.6
Format Group
The Format group controls the color and position of a selected object. Predefined
quick styles offer selection of uniform appearance for different objects. Selection
of multiple objects makes it possible to easily affect more than one object at the
same time.
Clicking the small arrow in the lower right corner of the Format group displays the
shadow, fill and outline properties with a number of additional format settings.
It is possible to use the Format Painter (in the Clipboard group) to copy color and
font properties from one object and paste it to another object.
Related information
Selecting Multiple Objects
Arrange
The Arrange control can be used to order, group, resize, align and distribute screen
objects.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
200
Ribbon Tabs
Order Objects
The commands in the Order Objects group are used to send objects to the front or
back of each other.
Command
Description
Bring to Front
Positions the selected object on top of any overlapping
objects
Send to Back
Positions the selected object behind any overlapping objects
Bring Forward
Makes the selected object swap place with the nearest
overlapping object
Send Backward
Makes the selected object swap place with the nearest
obscured object
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
201
Ribbon Tabs
Note:
The Object Browser offers an easy way of arranging objects to the front or back of each
other.
Related information
Object Browser
Group Objects
The Group Objects commands are used to manage selections of multiple objects.
A grouped object is moved and treated as one object with respect to formatting and
resizing, and can also be stored in the Component Library for reuse.
Any selection of objects on the screen can be grouped.
When multiple objects are selected, one object is the primary selection. This is
shown with an orange frame, while other objects in the group have blue frames.
Click on any object in the group to change this to the primary selection.
A grouped object can be resolved into individual objects using the Ungroup
command. A property that was given to the group will be kept by each of the
object, provided that the property is applicable.
Make Same Size
The Make Same Size commands are used to adjust the size of a group of selected
objects. The size will be determined by the primary selection (the guide object).
Position Objects
The Position Objects commands can be used to align and distribute multiple
objects neatly. Objects can be aligned vertically and horizontally using the primary
selection for the group as guide object. Objects can be aligned with respect to their
center (center/ middle) or their edges (top/bottom/right/left).
Related information
Component Library
Snap Objects to Other Objects
Grid
Quick Styles
The Quick Styles control contains a number of preset visual object color schemes
that can be applied to screen objects.
The predefined graphical styles make it possible to achieve a uniform appearance
on items like meters and trend viewers. An object that has a style applied can be
further customized, for example with font settings.
It is also possible to customize the predefined styles to styles of your own
preference. The quick styles are not specific to the current project. They will be
available for all iX Developer projects.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
202
Ribbon Tabs
Note:
Controls in the Style group on the General tab can be used to reshape objects such as
meter, slider and trend viewer to predefined styles. These styles are not the same as
the quick styles.
Related information
Font Group
Other Colors
Color settings for special properties of an object, for example scale color for a meter
or out-of-range validation of an analog numeric object, are available from the
Other Colors control.
Shape Fill
The Shape Fill control is used to alter the fill color and gradient of the selected
shape. A preview of the colors in the Shape Fill selection window is displayed
directly on the object on the screen as the pointer hovers over the different colors.
Shape Outline
The Shape Outline control is used to alter the outline color and outline width of
the selected shape.
Shape Effects
Shape Effects makes it possible to add bevel style and shadow effects.
Note:
Bevel in combination with fill color “no fill” is only supported for iX TxC and PC targets.
The bevel will not be visible in runtime on other operator panel targets.
8.1.7
Tag/Security Group
Connection to controller tags as well as object access (based on security groups)
and visibility are configured from the Tag/Security group.
Tag/Security group without and with selections
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
203
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Description
Select Tag
Connection to a tag from the tags configuration page. Tags
may also be added directly, but will be remain internal
until connected to a controller tag. Click ... to configure
expressions.
Select Security Groups
Allows limiting access of the object based on security
groups. If left empty, the object can be accessed by
anyone.
Select Visibility
Configuration of visibility:
Default: The visibility specified on the General tab of the
Security Manager is used
Disabled: The object is disabled for users with insufficient
access rights
Hidden: The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights
Normal: The object looks normal also for users with
insufficient access rights
Note:
When access rights are not fulfilled, showing an access denied message or opening a
login dialog can be configured using the security function.
Related information
Expressions
Adding Tags during Editing
Security Management
8.1.8
Name Group
All objects and screens are automatically named when they are created. The name
is displayed and can be edited in the Name group. Screen names can also be edited
in the Project Explorer.
The name of an object is a symbolic identifier and is an alphanumeric string,
beginning with a letter. Name strings can contain letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers
(0-9), and underscore (‘_’) characters.
Note:
Renaming objects and screens included in scripts will cause the scripts not to function.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
204
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Project Explorer
Invalid Names
8.2
Project Ribbon Tab
The Project ribbon tab contains a number of project related functions, divided
into the following groups:
Run Group
Transfer Group
Project Group
8.2.1
Run Group
The Run group enables validation, rebuilding, simulation and debugging of the
project.
Build
The build control validates the script code and compiles the current project.
Recompiling the project using the Build control will result in only the changes
being made to project to be recompiled. To fully recompile the project, instead
use the Rebuild control.
Rebuild
The rebuild control validates the script code and recompiles the complete project.
Run
A test of the project can be executed directly on the PC. Clicking Run will perform
a validation and start a simulation, if the project can be built. If errors are found
during validation, an error message will be displayed.
During simulation, the project will communicate directly with the configured
controllers, provided that the controllers are correctly connected to the
development environment.
If there are unused tags in the project, the Run, Build, and Rebuild commands will
result in a notification about this. The CheckForUnusedTags function can be
disabled or enabled under Options in the File menu.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
205
Ribbon Tabs
Note:
If project build fails, check that the absolute path to the project, including its
components, does not exceed 260 characters.
Note:
Projects must be stored on the local hard drive for iX Developer to be able to run or
simulate them.
Simulate
It is also possible to test and run the application on the development PC without
connection to the selected controller, by clicking Simulate. If the project is valid,
the simulation is started.
Debug
The Debug command will allow the user to debug scripts in a real c# debugger
with the possibility to set breakpoints etc. The command builds and checks the
current project, and launches the application associated with the generated file.
The function scans the development PC for an installed debugger. If no debugger
is found, a link for downloading debugger is presented. User preferences for the
script debugger may be entered under Options, available from the File menu.
Note:
Visual Studio 2008 requires SP1 in order for associated files to be opened automatically
(i.e. using the Debug command).
Debugging of a project with Script module included is not supported using Visual Studio
2010.
Debugging of a CE project is not supported using Visual Studio 2010.
Related information
Output
Database
Options
Removing Unused Tags
8.2.2
Transfer Group
The Transfer group enables download to operator panel, upload database and
export to folder functions.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
206
Ribbon Tabs
Note:
Time zone, region or daylight saving settings will not be transferred if these settings
have been changed manually in the panel.
Download
The Download control sends the project to an operator panel or a PC with an
iX Runtime installation, in the network environment.
Parameter
Description
Connected targets
Choose a target type to transfer the project to.
Download
Start the project transfer.
Click the “Download all source code ( for later upload) ”
checkbox to compress the project and save it as a ZIP file on
target.
Click the “Password protected” checkbox and enter a
password to protect the ZIP file.
Download is supported for TA, PC RT, QTERM, iX TxA, iX TxB,
and iX TxC targets, and for PC targets with a iX Runtime
installation.
Click the “Copy downloaded project to Memory Card”
checkbox to copy the downloaded project and the targets IP
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
207
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Description
settings to the memory card. When the project is copied to
the memory card, it can be used for restoring the project(1).
Verify
The verify function enables the user to check if a target
platform configuration is identical to the project
configuration.
Verify is supported for iX TxA, iX TxB and iX TxC targets. If
greyed out, please update to latest “System program”.
Log
Show the data being logged during the download and verify
process.
(1) Supported for panel iX TxA (image version 803 or higher), and iX TxB (image version
103 or higher).
An automatic check is done for mismatch between the iX Developer version and
the target system versions. All version parameters are considered. If the target is
indicated as being incompatible with the version of the iX Developer that hosts the
project, please update the target with the latest iX Runtime and system program
versions.
If the target for the download contains newer files or files that don’t exist in the
project, a dialog will appear prompting for which files to be kept, overwritten or
deleted.
If the same project is to be downloaded to a panel again, the original datalogger in
the panel will be replaced if any settings have been changed in the datalogger since
the last download.
Related information
iX panel Upgrade
Downloading a Project to an operator panel or a PC with an
iX Runtime installation
1. Connect the operator panel to the development PC via an Ethernet
connection.
2. Click Download.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
208
Ribbon Tabs
3. The download dialog opens and all panels connected in the network are
listed with information about IP address and panel type. Select the panel to
download to in the list.
4. Check that the IP address is correct and click Download.
a. Optional: Click the “Include compressed project” checkbox to compress
the project and save it as a ZIP file.
b. Optional: Click the “Password protected” checkbox and enter a password
to protect the ZIP file.
c. Optional: Click the “Copy downloaded project to Memory card”
checkbox to enable SD-card backup of operator panel project and
settings.
The panel responds to a download request by stopping any current project.
The panel displays that it is ready for project download. When the download is
completed, the new project automatically starts running.
The project folder is located at the following path. Only for PC targets!
%public%\Documents\Beijer Electronics AB\iX Developer Runtime\Project.
Windows XP: Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Beijer
Electronics AB\iX Developer Runtime\Project.
The panel settings can be controlled from the Service menu in the panel.
Note:
It is necessary to open TCP port 9999 and UDP port 9999 in the firewall for the runtime
PC application.
Note:
Do not attempt to use the Download command if a project opened with the .exe file is
open. This might fail to close the project and the transfer will not be completed.
Note:
If Chinese or Korean languages are to be used in the operator panel, then firewalls
in Windows must be configured to allow TransferClient.exe full access on all ports,
otherwise project transfer might fail.
Related information
Service Menu
Starting a iX Runtime project on a PC
Downloading a Project to an operator panel or a PC with an
iX Runtime installation Using FTP
A project can be loaded to the panel via FTP. To be able to load a project remotely
an external storage device (SD card or USB stick) must be attached, and a
configuration file named ProjectCopy.config must be present in the root directory
of the storage device.
Set up the configuration file as follows. Use # for parameters to be ignored.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
209
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Description
automatic
the download of the project automatically starts,
without any dialogs, when a project file is loaded to
the storage device and the panel is rebooted
path "\Storage
Card\Project3"
the path to the project, if multiple projects are
stored on the storage device. SD cards use the path
\StorageCard\ and devices attached to USB use
\HardDisk\
applyipsettings
applies saved IP settings
deletesource
deletes the source file from the storage device after
the download
deleteconfigfile
deletes the configuration file after the download. If
the configuration file is left on the storage device it is
initiated each time the panel is rebooted.
Note:
This is only supported in the latest released images.
Example:
In the following example, without displaying any dialogs, the project found in the
folder Project_5 located on the USB stick is loaded, the project is deleted from the USB
stick, and the configuration file is deleted. The IP-settings are not updated.
•
automatic
•
path "\HardDisk\Project_5"
•
#applyipsettings
•
deletesource
•
deleteconfigfile
Upload Database
The Upload Database command will collect the database from an operator panel
in the network environment to a file on the development PC. The panel will pause
during the upload, and will be started automatically afterwards.
The database may only be collected from a panel running the same project (i.e.
a project with the same name and of the same size) as the current iX Developer
project.
Collecting a Database from an operator panel
1. Connect the operator panel to the development PC via an Ethernet
connection.
2. Click Upload Database.
3. The Upload Database dialog opens and all panels connected in the network
are listed with information about IP address and panel type. Select the panel to
collect from in the list.
4. Check that the IP address is correct and click Backup.
5. Select location of the saved database.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
210
Ribbon Tabs
Export
Exports the project to a folder. The export dialog allows creating a new folder.
When exporting the project to Folder the user can select whether the panel IP
settings should be set. If yes, the Target Settings dialog is opened.
Assigning IP Settings is only supported for iX TxA, iX TxB and TA targets.
Exporting a Project to an operator panel or a PC with an
iX Runtime Installation
A project can be exported to an operator panel or a PC with an iX Runtime
installation via the Export command. The project can be exported to a USB stick
or, on the condition that a network connection is configured, directly to a folder in
the runtime PC.
The project in the runtime PC is started by running the .exe file located in the
project folder.
There will also be created a TransferClient .exe file, a binaries folder and
a configuration file. The TransferClient is a standalone application for
downloading the exported project to a target. It works in the same way as the
Download control from inside iX Developer. It is possible to view a log for the
export by clicking the Log button on the TransferClient dialog.
Note:
It is not recommended to handle further project transfers from a PC already used as
a target for export. If additional transfers are to be done, then keep using the same
export method for all.
Related information
Download
Starting a iX Runtime project on a PC
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
211
Ribbon Tabs
Starting a iX Runtime project on a PC
The different methods of transfer will have an impact on how the projects are
started and stopped in the runtime PC. It is recommended to keep to one of the
selected transfer methods to avoid problems.
When a project has been transferred to a PC using the Download command, the
project normally starts automatically when the computer is started. However if
the project is stopped and needs to be restarted, this should be done via the Target
Control Service in Windows. This will ensure that the status of the project is fully
recognized for all functions that depend on this.
To manually open or close a project in iX Runtime for a PC target, go to the
Services tab in Windows Task Manager. Click on the item Target Control
Service and the available commands are shown on the top left of the list.
Double-clicking the Target Control Service item opens a dialog box that displays
Service Status along with other additional settings. Start or stop the project from
here.
A running project will then be visible when entering the iX Developer transfer
dialog.
Note:
If a runtime PC project is started using the project .exe file, the Target Control Service
will not recognize that the project is running. This will lead to problems using the iX
Developer transfer functions.
A project that has been transferred using the Export command must be started by
opening the .exe-file in the project folder. A running project is not detected by any
of the transfer or service status dialogs in the runtime PC. This means that it is up
to the user to keep track of the status.
8.2.3
Project Group
The project target, as well as name and title, are available for editing in the Project
Group. The project title is displayed in the title bar in runtime by default. Leaving
the title empty displays the screen name/screen title only in runtime.
The Project Group also contains the Compress Project command, a Project
Settings control and the possibility to refer to other assemblies using the
Referenced Assemblies control.
Related information
Compress Project
Settings
Referenced Assemblies
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
212
Ribbon Tabs
Compress Project
The project source files can be compressed into a Zip file using the Compress
Project command. The Zip file can be saved to a USB stick or, on the condition
that a network connection is configured, directly to a folder in the runtime PC.
Parameter
Description
Path to Zip file
Browse to the location to save the Zip file.
Password protected
Optional password protection of the Zip file.
Related information
Opening a Project
Settings
Properties such as application behavior in runtime, system font, and settings for
mouse and keyboard can be edited by clicking Settings in the Project group.
Related information
Deployment
Display/Target
Mouse/Touch Input Delay
System Font
Virtual Keyboard
Screen Name and Screen Title
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
213
Ribbon Tabs
Deployment
Parameter
Description
Overwrite Files on
Target
This setting can be used to determine the default behavior
when transferring projects and the transfer finds critical
files already present on the target.
Pre Transfer
Add commands to be executed before the file transfer.
Only available for standard PC targets.
Post Transfer
Add commands to be executed after the file transfer. Only
available for standard PC targets.
Related information
Pre Transfer
Post Transfer
Pre Transfer
The following commands can be executed before the file transfer:
Command
Description
Reboot
Reboots the target. Possible arguments: True and False.
Using True, the target tries to start any project present.
The argument False, or no argument, prevents the target
from starting the project automatically.
Wait
Pauses the execution of the commands. This can be useful
if the user runs commands that takes time for the target to
recover from. Possible arguments: a number, indicating
how many whole seconds to wait.
Run
Starts any given process. The first argument must always
be the path to the executable to be run. Keep it inside
quotes if it contains spaces.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
214
Ribbon Tabs
Command
Description
Other arguments:
/p: or -p: are parameters for the process to start. The
parameters must be inside quotes and separated by
spaces.
/noshell or -noshell means that the process should be run
outside of the command shell.
/wd: or -wd: means working directory for the process to
run. If left empty defaults to active projects directory.
The parameters must be inside quotes.
/wait: or -wait: means that the TargetControlService
should wait until the process has exited before continuing.
If the process does not exit by itself, this argument should
be left out.
It is possible to use the following macros in conjunction with the Run commands:
Macro
$projectpath$
Description
Replaced by target project folder. If the user has
downloaded an executable together with the project and
wants to run it, this macro represents the destination folder.
Example: "$projectpath$\dbbackup.exe"
/p:"backup.bak" -noshell -wait
This runs the dbbackup.exe with the startup argument
backup.bak, it runs outside the command shell due to
-noshell, and the transfer does not continue until the
process has exited due to -wait.
$startproject$
Registers and starts the project. The transfer continues.
$finished$
Tells the system that the transfer is finished and closes
connections. The project does not start. Should only be
used in Post Transfer.
Note:
Only available for iX TxC and PC targets.
Post Transfer
The same commands and macros as for the Pre Transfer can be used, but are
executed after the file transfer.
Note:
Only available for PC targets.
Related information
Pre Transfer
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
215
Ribbon Tabs
Display/Target
Parameter
Description
No Title Bar(1)
Displays the project without title bar in runtime.
Title Bar
Displays the project with its title and a set of minimize,
maximize and close buttons in the title bar.
Close Button
Displays the project with its title and a close button in the
title bar.
Topmost
Makes the project the topmost application in runtime.
Only available for iX TxC and PC targets.
Maximize On Startup
Makes the project maximized in runtime.
Only available for PC targets.
Screen Size
Screen resolution.
Only available for PC targets.
Panel Rotate
Displays selected rotation. It is possible to change the
rotation of the panel and panel content by 0, 90, 180 or 270
degrees. Only available for T7A, T10A and iX TxB targets.
Panel Type
Displays selected target. It is possible to select another
target.
(1) No Title Bar can not be used for popup screens.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
216
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Changing Project Target
Changing Project Target
When changing to another target, you can select to automatically resize objects to
the new target size. Different scale factors are used horizontally and vertically, to
optimize conversion to and from wide screen targets. In this case, the aspect ratio
of objects changes.
The following items are resized with the same factor when having selected
automatic resizing:
Item
Graphical objects
Popup screens
Font(1)
Dynamics size and move
(1)A minimum scaled font of 10 pixels ensures readability in the smaller operator
panels.
Not all objects and styles are supported for all project targets. When changing to
another project target, objects and styles that are not supported in the new target
are deleted and are possible to restore. Removed objects are logged, and displayed
in a window after the transformation. The log may be saved to file. Build files are
always cleaned and project saved after transformation.
Note:
Changing back to the previous target does not restore removed objects.
Mouse/Touch Input Delay
It is possible to configure a delay of mouse and touch screen input in runtime.
This setting is global and affects all objects for which Delay Mouse/Touch Input
is selected. The Property grid is used to enable delay of mouse and touch screen
input for individual objects.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
217
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Property Grid
System Font
Parameter
Description
Font
Select a system font that is used as the default font.
Font Size
Use the increase/decrease font size buttons or set a
specific default font size.
Virtual Keyboard
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
218
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Description
Enable Virtual
Keyboard
Select whether a virtual keyboard is to be displayed when
alphanumerical input is needed.
Keyboard Layout
The layout of the virtual keyboard.
The virtual keyboard that is displayed in runtime depends on settings made for
the Multiple Languages function. If only the default language is used, the project
settings (above) are used.
Some of the virtual keyboards available in iX Developer provide a user dictionary
where all new words entered are saved. If the built-in login dialog is used, then
passwords are not saved, but if a custom login dialog is created by scripting, then
passwords will be saved.
Related information
Language Management
Referenced Assemblies
The Referenced Assemblies command makes it possible to refer to your own
or third-party .Net assemblies (.dll). Their methods and properties are made
available when scripting and are included by the name completion function, in the
same way as for built-in components.
1. Click on Referenced Assemblies.
2. Click Add.
3. Browse to the desired dll file in your PC environment and click Open.
The methods and properties of the added dll file are now available for scripting.
When referencing your own third-party assembly (.dll file) make sure not to have
two files with the same fully qualified assembly name in the same folder:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
219
Ribbon Tabs
Example:
You have the files "Iocomp.Instrumentation.CF2005.Ultra.dll" and
"Iocomp.Instrumentation.CF2005.Ultra.WindowsCE.asmmeta.dll" in the same
folder. Both have the same fully qualified assembly name (but different file names).
Trying to add a control from the first assembly seems to work. However when the
application uses namespaces in the XAML to locate the correct assembly it picks one
of them, and it might be either of them. If it is the wrong assembly you get a message
saying that there is an error in the XAML.
8.3
System Ribbon Tab
The System ribbon tab controls system settings. These settings are divided into
the following groups:
Date, Time, and Region Group
Buzzer Group
Backlight Group
Serial Ports Group
Servers Group
Output Devices Group
Service Menu Group
8.3.1
Date, Time, and Region Group
National settings are made in the Date, Time and Region group.
Select time zone, whether to adjust for daylight saving, and region. If no time zone
is selected, the time zone that has been selected for the panel or PC will be retained.
Choose SNTP time synchronization if the panel clock is to be synchronized
against an external SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server. Enter the
name of the SNTP server and the time interval for the synchronization.
Note:
The SNTP time synchronization is supported from iX TxA version 703 and iX TxB version
231.
The date and time display format (for example using AM/PM for time) is based
on the operating system settings. For operator panel projects, this format may
be altered by selecting another region.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
220
Ribbon Tabs
For a PC the regional settings for date and time display need to be changed in the
system account to be carried out correctly.
1. Go to the Control Panel and select Clock, Language and Region, then
Region and Language.
2. Make the regional settings in the dialog box under the Formats tab.
3. Then go to the Administrative tab and click Copy settings.
4. In the dialog box that appears, check Copy current settings to: Welcome
screen and system accounts, and click OK.
5. Reboot the system to apply the new settings.
Note:
iX TxC targets only:
If the regional settings are changed only for the user account without copying them to
the system account, the new settings will not be applied when downloading a project,
even after a reboot.
8.3.2
Buzzer Group
Select whether to let a key beep sound when making keyboard input in runtime.
Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.
8.3.3
Backlight Group
Select to automatically turn off the backlight after a certain number of seconds,
and whether to keep the backlight on if a notifier window (e.g. alarm indicator or
communication error message) is visible.
The backlight settings for a project are saved in the operator panel. Consequently,
changes of the backlight settings for the present project will revert to the operator
panel values. However downloading another project will overwrite the settings.
Backlight settings are supported only for operator panel targets. For other targets,
the Microsoft Windows screen saver may be used.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
221
Ribbon Tabs
8.3.4
Serial Ports Group
For each of the COM ports, select if it is to be configured as an RS232, RS422 or
RS485 port. Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.
The number of available ports and possible configuration differ depending on
selected target.
For Panel iX TxA, iX TxB, iX TxC and IPC, four COM ports can be configured:
Port
Description
COM1
RS232 incl. CTS
COM2
RS422 or RS485
COM3
RS232 excl. CTS
COM4
RS422 incl. RTS or RS485
Label on back of panel
Port 1
Port 2
For Panel T15BR and T15BM, two COM ports can be configured:
Port
Description
Label on back of panel
COM1
RS232 incl. CTS
Port 1
COM2
RS422 or RS485
Port 2
8.3.5
Servers Group
The Servers group contains the FTP, Web Server, OPC UA Server and Remote
Access commands. The FTP and Remote Access commands are only available
when an operator panel is selected as target.
FTP
When enabled, it is possible to upload/download files to/from the operator panel
provided that there is an FTP client program in the development PC, e.g. Internet
Explorer, Windows Commander or some other standard FTP program.
It is possible to set up access to the FTP server with login requirements and/or as
anonymous. An anonymous user has read-only access rights. A user that logs in
with the correct user name and password gets read/write access rights.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
222
Ribbon Tabs
It is possible to allow access to an SD card or a USB stick used in the target. If
multiple USB sticks are used in the target, only the first one can be accessed.
FTP is only available when an operator panel is selected as target.
FTP is not supported for iX TxC.
Remote Access
The Remote Access function makes it possible to access, reflect and control an
operator panel from a PC by using the free VNC client program Remote Access
Viewer together with the built-in VNC server in the operator panel.
It is possible to set up Remote Access with a view only password and/or a full access
password. The view only password allows reflecting the panel remotely; the full
access password allows also control of maneuverable objects in the panel.
Only one VNC client can connect to the VNC server.
Only available when an operator panel is selected as target.
To protect secrecy when entering a password via Remote Access Viewer, it is
recommended to use the PC keyboard. Otherwise it is possible that the cursor on
the remote operator panel displays which keys are pressed on the alphanumeric
keyboard.
For more information about Remote Access, refer to the documentation for
Remote Access and Remote Access Viewer.
Web Server
Enables the possibility to host project files for a web client.
Parameter
Description
Enable Web Server
Click this checkbox to enable the web server.
Port
Enter a server port number.
Enable forms
authentication
Click this checkbox to enable forms authentication and
enter user name and password.
The password can be any alphanumeric string. The
passwords minimum length is four characters and the
maximum length is 20 characters.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
223
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Web Server
OPC UA Server
Enables the possibility to publish tags with an OPC UA Server.
Parameter
Description
Enable OPC UA Server
Click this checkbox to enable the OPC UA server.
Port
Enter a server port number.
Allow anonymous login
Click this checkbox to enable anonymous login. For a
secured login enter user name and password and leave the
checkbox unchecked.
Address space
All tags, except array tags, defined in project will be shown.
The tags will be put in a folder named Tags in Namespace TagProvider on the
server.
The NodeClass of all tags will be Variable.
All tag values will be published scaled with the offset and gain of the tag.
Tag Properties Mapping
Parameter
Description
Tag property
UA Server Attribute
Name
DisplayName /
BrowseName
Data Type
DataType
Access Right
AccessLevel /
UserAccessLevel
Description
Description
Poll Group Interval
MinimumSamplingInterval
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
224
Ribbon Tabs
Certificate
A certificate will be auto generated and self-signed when the server first starts up.
The certificate will be valid for 20 years.
The certificate contains no IP address since this could change after the certificate
has been generated.
Limitations
Limitation
Description
Discovery
Not supported
Encoding / Transport
Only UA TCP Binary
User authentication
Only user name / password
Only one account
Security
No encryption support
Related information
OPC UA Client
8.3.6
Output Devices Group
Printer devices can be set up by clicking the Settings control in the Output Devices
group.
Printer Device
USB Printer Connection
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
225
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Description
Printer Connector
Select USB
Printer Type
Select printer type. Selection possibilities: PCLINKJET and
PCLLASERJET.
Printer supports PCL
5c
Click this checkbox if the printer supports the PCL 5c color
printer protocol.
This option is only available if the printer type is set to
PCLLASERJET.
Network settings
Not available
Serial settings
Not available
Page Orientation
Portrait or landscape orientation of the printout
Ethernet Printer Connection
Parameter
Description
Printer Connector
Select Ethernet
Printer Type
Select printer type. Selection possibilities: PCLINKJET and
PCLLASERJET.
Printer supports PCL
5c
Click this checkbox if the printer supports the PCL 5c color
printer protocol.
This option is only available if the printer type is set to
PCLLASERJET.
Network settings
Enter Printer name / path
Enter user name
Enter password
Serial settings
Not available
Page Orientation
Portrait or landscape orientation of the printout
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
226
Ribbon Tabs
Serial Printer Connection
Parameter
Description
Printer Connector
Select Serial
Printer Type
Not available
Printer supports PCL 5c
Not available
Network settings
Not available
Serial Settings
Port Name: Select which COM-port the printer is
connected to
Baud Rate: Select the baud rate for transmission of data.
Data Bits: Select the number of data bits in each
character.
Parity: Set the parity bit. The parity bit in each character
can be set to none , odd, even, mark or space.
Stop Bits: Select the number of stop bits to be sent at the
end of every character. Selection possibilities: None,
One, Two or TwoPointFive.
Hand Shake: Select which handshaking protocol to be
used. Selection possibilities: XON/XOFF, CTS/RTS.
New Line Character: Select end of line character.
Selection possibilities: None, CR/LF, CR or LF.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
227
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Description
Serial Settings
Page Length (lines): Select the number of lines to be
printed out before form feed. Form feed will not take
place if the page length is set to 0.
Page Width (characters): Set the page width specified as
the maximum characters in a single line of text.
Code page: The code page consists of a table of
values that describes the character set for a particular
language. The default code page in iX Developer is 850.
Page Orientation
Not available
Printouts via operator panel
When printing to a serial printer from an operator panel, the printer must support
IBM character set (850).
When printing to a USB printer from an operator panel, the printer must support
PCL levels according to the table below:
Printer class
requirement
Printer type
Recommended
printer model
Color laser printer
USB + PCL 5c
HP LaserJet 2700
Monochrome laser printer
USB + PCL 5e
HP LaserJet 1320
Color ink-jet printer
USB + PCL 3e
HP Deskjet 5652
When printing via Ethernet from an operator panel, the network printer must be a
shared resource in the Windows network.
Connecting a printer via Ethernet requires that a PC is connected between the
operator panel and the printer.
Printing to a color laser printer via Ethernet is not supported for operator panels.
PCL 6 is not supported at all on operator panels.
8.3.7
Service Menu Group
The Service Menu group provides a possibility to protect the service menu with a
pin code.
Parameter
Pincode
Description
Enter a pincode for the service menu. No pincode enables
the service menu for all users. Only numbers (0–9) are
allowed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
228
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Service Menu
8.4
Insert Ribbon Tab
The Functions group, available from the Insert ribbon tab, contains functions and
screen that can be added to the project.
Functions Group
8.4.1
Functions Group
All added components are available from Project Explorer folders. The Project
Explorer already includes alarm server, multiple languages, security functions and
tags. All functions are managed through their configuration pages.
Parameter
Description
Text Library
With the text library function, text tables can be created,
where values are linked to texts.
Data Logger
Data can be logged and saved to a database on time
intervals or depending on changed values.
Alarm Distributor
Alarms can be distributed between operator panels, with
notification via printer, SMS or e-mail using the alarm
distributor.
Script
A script module can be included to program features not
covered by included functions and actions, or to be used to
share functionality among functions.
Recipe Management
Several recipes can be inserted in the project. Each recipe
function handles a pre-defined set of recipe items.
Function Keys
Function keys for operator panels as well as for the regular
PC keyboard can be configured.
Scheduler
A scheduler can be used to control events in the process
at special times.
Audit Trail
The Audit Trail function enables tracking of operator
actions.
Reports
The reports function allows adding Excel report templates
to the project.
Screens
The Screen control adds new screens to the current
project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
229
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Project Explorer
Configuration Pages
8.5
View Ribbon Tab
The Windows group, available from the View ribbon tab, contains controls to
toggle visibility of the tool windows:
Windows Group
8.5.1
Windows Group
The tool controls in the Windows group are highlighted when active.
Tool window
Description
Default Position
Project
Explorer
Shows all screens and components
included in the application
Docked to the left part of
the application window
Output
Displays detailed information
concerning the project validation and
build
Docks to the lower part of
the application window
Cross
Reference
Provides an overview of where a
specific tag is used
Docks to the right part of
the application window
Error List
Displays information about problems
and errors detected during build
Docks to the lower part of
the application window
Navigation
Overview
Provides an overview of all screens
included in the project, with zooming
facilities.
Floating window
Navigation
Manager
Manages screens and screen navigation
Desktop area
Property
Grid
Shows detailed properties of a selected
screen or object
Docks to the right part of
the application window
as a tab
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
230
Ribbon Tabs
Tool window
Description
Default Position
Object
Browser
Displays an overview of all objects in
the current screen and enables setting
visibility and locking objects easily, as
well as placing objects in front or back
of each other.
Floating window
Component
Library
Contains predefined as well as
user-defined graphical components
Docks to the right part of
the application window
as a tab
8.6
Dynamics Ribbon Tab
The Dynamics ribbon tab includes the following groups:
Layout Group
Color Group
General Group
The controls on the Dynamics tab are used to change the properties of an object
depending on a changed tag value.
A lock icon resembling a chain indicates that a specific dynamic setting is made
for the selected object.
If, for example, dynamic fill settings are made, it is not possible to make fill settings
for the object from the Format group on the Home tab.
Note:
Security has higher priority than dynamics.
Visibility has higher priority than blink.
Note:
Scripting to a property for which Dynamics has been configured disables the dynamic
settings.
To release an object from a dynamic control, click the control with the lock icon
and click Clear Dynamics in the appearing dialog.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
231
Ribbon Tabs
8.6.1
Layout Group
Move
The Move control in the Position group changes an object’s position, based on a
tag value.
Position coordinates on the screen are given in pixels of the screen resolution. The
position 0,0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the screen.
To move an object vertically when a tag value changes:
1. Draw and position the object at the start position. Keep the object selected.
2. Click on Move on the Dynamics tab to open the Move Dynamics Editor.
3. Select the tag to control the movement.
4. Enter a start and end value for the tag.
Start and end positions are suggested based on the current start position. A
ghost object will appear at the suggested finish position. A guide line that
connects the center of the original object with the ghost object appears.
5. Move the ghost object in the screen to its final position.
The coordinates for the object is updated. An animation of the move appears
on the screen. Coordinate values can also be updated directly in the numerical
fields (End Top, End Left). The coordinates for start and finish will limit the
movement of the object irrespective if the tag value is outside its start and end
value.
6. Click OK to save and close the Move Dynamics Editor.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
232
Ribbon Tabs
When Position or Size dynamics is applied, moving or resizing of the object will
be disabled. A lock icon resembling a chain in the upper left corner of the object
(when selected) indicates that the object has a dynamic control applied and that
it cannot be moved or resized.
Size
The Size control in the Size group changes an object’s size, based on a tag value.
Dynamic resizing of external picture files may result in a resolution loss if the
picture is enlarged to a size larger than what is used elsewhere in the current
project.
Width and height of an object are given in pixels of the screen resolution.
To resize the width of an object when a tag value changes:
1. Draw and size the object at its start size. Keep the object selected.
2. Click on Size on the Dynamics tab to open the Resize Dynamics Editor.
3. Select the tag to control the resizing.
4. Fill in the values that for start and finish. Size is given in screen resolution
pixels.
Start size is suggested based on the current start size. A finish size is suggested
as a fixed increase of the start size horizontally and vertically. A ghost object
will appear with the finish size.
The object can only be resized from left to right and top to bottom.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
233
Ribbon Tabs
5. Resize the ghost object in the screen to its final size.
The coordinates for the object is updated. An animation of the resizing
appears on the screen. Coordinate values can also be updated directly in the
numerical fields (End Width, End Height). The coordinates for start and
finish will limit the size of the object irrespective if the tag value is outside its
start and end value.
6. Click OK to save and close the Resize Dynamics Editor.
When Position or Size dynamics is applied, moving or resizing of the object will
be disabled. A lock icon resembling a chain in the upper left corner of the object
(when selected) indicates that the object has a dynamic control applied and that
it cannot be moved or resized.
8.6.2
Color Group
The Fill and Outline controls in the Color group change an object’s fill color or
outline (border) color, based on a tag value.
To alter the fill color of an object when a tag value changes:
1. Draw the object. Keep the object selected.
2. Click on Fill on the Dynamics tab to open the Color Dynamics Editor.
3. Select the tag that is to control the color.
4. Fill in values to trigger color change.
5. Select color and gradient from the color menu.
6. Click OK to save and close the Color Dynamics Editor.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
234
Ribbon Tabs
8.6.3
General Group
Visibility
The Visible control in the Visibility group determines if an object is to be
displayed in the screen or not, based on a tag value.
To hide an object when a tag value changes:
1. Draw the object. Keep the object selected.
2. Click on Visible on the Dynamics tab.
3. Select the tag that is to control visibility. The object will be visible on the
screen at a certain tag value.
The selected value will be treated as True (visible). All other values will be treated
as False (invisible).
Blink
It is possible to select a tag to enable blinking depending on the tag’s current value.
The selected value will be treated as True (blink enabled). All other values will be
treated as False (blink disabled).
The blink interval can be set dynamically or constantly.
Note:
Security has higher priority than dynamics.
Visibility has higher priority than blink.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
235
Ribbon Tabs
Related information
Blinking Objects
General
The general control offers a possibility to alter the properties of objects in
iX Runtime.
Converter Operators
Converter operators are used to alter the properties of the objects. The converter
operators can be selected from the Edit general dynamics dialog.
Parameter
Description
Bool Converter
Converts 0 to false and all other values to
true.
Color Converter
Converts value intervals to specified
colors.
Linear Converter
Converts values according to the linear
equation.
Raw Converter
Converts the value to a new value
matching the target type.
Text Library Group converter
Converts a value to a text.
Edit General Dynamics
The Edit general dynamics dialog contains different properties depending on
which object is selected. The dialog is accessed by clicking the General control
on the General group.
Parameter
Converter
Object
Description
3D View
·bool
Chart
Set a 3D look and feel for the
chart
Acknowledge all
·bool
Alarm viewer
Set visibility for the
Acknowledge All button.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
236
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Converter
Object
Description
Acknowledge
selected
·bool
Alarm viewer
Set visibility for the
Acknowledge Selected
button.
Address
·raw
Web browser
Change the default URL.
·text library
group
Alternate
background color
·color interval
Animated
label
Set background color.
Alternate
foreground color
·color interval
Animated
label
Set foreground color.
Animation speed
·linear
Animated
label
Set animation speed.
Auto-size
·bool
Button color
·color interval
Alarm viewer
Set the button color
Button height
·raw
Alarm viewer
Set the height of the
buttons.
Alarm viewer
Alter the width of the
buttons.
Set visibility for the Clear
button.
Resize the object according
to the size of the default text
string length and font size.
·linear
Button width
·raw
·linear
Clear
·bool
Alarm viewer
Clockwise
·bool
Circular meter Set the rotation orientation.
Column header
color
·color interval
End angle
·raw
Set the column header
background color.
Circular meter Set the end angle.
·linear
PDF-file
·raw
PDF viewer
Select PDF file to add to the
PDF viewer.
Alarm viewer
Set visibility for the filter
button.
·text library
group
Filter
·bool
Font color
·color interval
Set font color in for instance
the text object.
Font size
·raw
Set font size in for instance
the text object.
·linear
Group background
·color interval
Action menu
Set the group background
color.
Group foreground
·color interval
Action menu
Set the group foreground
color.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
237
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Header
Converter
·raw
Object
Chart
Description
Set the header.
·text library
group
High Region Color
·color interval
Circular meter Set the high region color.
High Region Max
·raw
Circular meter Set the maximum value of
the high region indicator.
·linear
High Region Min
·raw
·linear
Circular meter Set the minimum value of
the high region indicator.
Indicator color
·color interval
Info
·bool
Alarm viewer
Set visibility for the info
button.
Active
·bool
Chart
Activate or stop the data
input.
Enabled
·bool
Show header
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the header.
Show legend
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the legend.
Read only
·bool
Auto-scale X-axis
·bool
Chart
Used with the chart
object to toggle whether
iX Runtime automatically
should calculate the
minimum and maximum
X Axis values or not.
Show X-axis grid
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the X Axis
grid.
Show X-axis
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the X Axis.
Auto-scale Y1-axis
·bool
Chart
Used with the chart
object to toggle whether
iX Runtime automatically
should calculate the
minimum and maximum
Y1 Axis values or not.
Show Y1-axis grid
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the Y1 Axis
grid.
Show Y1-axis
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the Y1 Axis.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Set the indicator color in for
instance the circular meter
object.
Enable or disable an object.
Control whether for instance
an analog numeric object
editable or not.
238
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Converter
Object
Description
Auto-scale Y2-axis
·bool
Chart
The bool converter can be
used with the chart object to
toggle whether iX Runtime
automatically should
calculate the minimum
and maximum Y2 Axis values
or not.
Show Y2-axis grid
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the Y2 Axis
grid.
Show Y2-axis
·bool
Chart
Set visibility for the Y2 Axis.
Lock aspect ratio
·bool
Multi picture
Used with the multi picture
object to toggle the
height/width ratio of the
object.
Low region color
·color interval
Circular meter Set the low region color.
Low region max
·raw
Circular meter Set the maximum value of
the low region indicator.
·linear
Low region min
·raw
·linear
Major ticks
Circular meter Set the minimum value of
the low region indicator.
·raw
Set the number of labeled
time marks in for instance
the linear meter object.
·linear
Maximum
·raw
Set the end value of the
scale in for instance the
linear meter object.
·linear
Major value tics
·raw
Trend viewer
Set the number of labeled
scale marks on the scale.
Trend viewer
Set the end value of the
scale.
Trend viewer
Set the start value of the
scale.
Trend viewer
Set the number of scale
ticks between two adjacent
major ticks on the scale.
·linear
Max value
·raw
·linear
Min value
·raw
·linear
Minor value ticks
·raw
·linear
Medium region
color
·color interval
Circular meter Set the medium region color.
Medium region
max
·raw
Circular meter Set the maximum value
of the medium region
indicator.
·linear
Medium region min ·raw
·linear
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Circular meter Set the minimum value
of the medium region
indicator.
239
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Minimum
Converter
Object
·raw
Set the start value of the
scale in for instance the
linear meter object.
·linear
Minor ticks
·raw
Set the number of scale
ticks between two adjacent
major ticks.
·linear
Lower limit
·raw
·linear
Opacity
Analog
numeric
·raw
·raw
Set the outline thickness of
for instance the rectangle
object.
·linear
Picture height
·raw
Set the minimum value that
can be entered.
Set the opacity of for
instance the PDF viewer
object.
·linear
Outline thickness
Description
Button
Set picture height.
Picture
Set the picture shown in the
picture object.
·linear
Picture name
·raw
·text library
group
Picture stretch
·bool
Button
Stretch a picture.
Picture width
·raw
Button
Set the picture width.
·linear
Play/Pause
·bool
Alarm viewer
Set visibility for the pause
button.
Prefix
·raw
Analog
numeric
Set a prefix to the digits
entered.
Rectangle
Set the radius of the X axis in
the rectangle object.
Rectangle
Set the radius of the Y axis.
·text library
group
Radius X
·raw
·linear
Radius Y
·raw
·linear
Scale color
·color interval
Circular meter Set the scale color.
Scale
·bool
Circular meter Set visibility for the scale.
Selected
background
·color interval
Action menu
Set the background color of
the selected action.
Selected
foreground
·color interval
Action menu
Set the foreground color of
the selected action.
Selected group
background
·color interval
Action menu
Set the background color of
the selected menu group.
Selected group
foreground
·color interval
Action menu
Set the foreground color of
the selected menu group.
Separator color
·color interval
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
Set the separator color.
240
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Source
Converter
·raw
Object
Media player
Description
Set the source file.
·text library
group
Start angle
·raw
Circular meter Set the start angle.
·linear
Stretch
·bool
Suffix
·raw
·text library
group
Text
Adjust the height and width
to the selection frame in for
instance the picture object.
Analog
numeric
·raw
Set the text shown in for
instance the text object.
·text library
group
Title
·raw
Set a suffix to the digits
entered in the analog
numeric object.
Roller panel
Set the title.
·text library
group
Title background
color
·color interval
Roller panel
Set the title background
color.
Title foreground
color
·color interval
Roller panel
Set the title foreground
color.
Transparent
·bool
Upper limit
·raw
Value
Set the transparency of for
instance the button object.
·linear
Analog
numeric
Set the maximum value that
can be entered.
·raw
Progress bar
Set the value.
Line
Set the X1 pixel coordinates
Line
Set the X2 pixel coordinates
Line
Set the X3 pixel coordinates
Line
Set the X4 pixel coordinates
·linear
X1
·raw
·linear
X2
·raw
·linear
X3
·raw
·linear
X4
·raw
·linear
X-axis grid color
·color interval
Chart
Set the grid color of the X
axis.
X-axis max value
·raw
Chart
Set the maximum value of
the X axis.
Chart
Set the minimum value of
the X axis
·linear
X-axis min value
·raw
·linear
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
241
Ribbon Tabs
Parameter
Converter
Object
Description
Y1-axis grid color
·color interval
Chart
Set the grid color of the Y1
axis.
Y1-axis max value
·raw
Chart
Set the maximum value of
the Y1 axis.
Chart
Set the minimum value of
the Y1 axis.
·linear
Y1-axis min value
·raw
·linear
Y2-axis grid color
·color interval
Chart
Set the grid color of the Y2
axis.
Y2-axis max value
·raw
Chart
Set the maximum value of
the Y2 axis.
Chart
Set the minimum value of
the Y2 axis.
·linear
Y2-axis min value
·raw
·linear
Related information
Text Library
8.7
General Ribbon Tab
The General ribbon tab contains different property groups and controls for
different objects. Appearance can be modified for graphical shapes and objects.
Scale settings can be made for meters and trend viewers. Additional settings can be
made for some objects.
The Tag/Security group is available also on the Home ribbon tab.
The general properties are described separately for each object.
Related information
HMI Controls in the Objects group
Media Controls in the Objects group
Special Controls in the Objects group
Windows Controls in the Objects group
Tag/Security Group on the Home Ribbon Tab
8.8
Actions Ribbon Tab
Actions can be triggered in various ways, for example by clicking a button. The
Actions tab controls are used to define actions for objects. Alternatively, a script
can be used to trigger an action.
An action is something that is performed, for example closing a screen. An action
trigger is the act that generates an action, for example clicking a button.
The Actions ribbon tab contains different control groups for different objects.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
242
Ribbon Tabs
A Click action configured for a button
Note:
It is not recommended to use multiple trigger methods, as this may lead to undesired
behavior. It is recommended either to use a script or to program actions with
the controls in the Actions tab. For example, avoid using Click Action Trigger in
combination with Mouse Button Action Triggers.
Related information
Script
8.8.1
Click Action Trigger
Most objects can be assigned click actions, that will be executed when the object is
clicked in runtime.
8.8.2
Mouse Button Action Triggers
The Mouse Down and Mouse Up action triggers can be used to create two-step
actions when clicking with the left mouse button on an object.
Parameter
Description
Mouse Down
A Mouse Down action will be performed when the left mouse
button is pressed down on the object in runtime.
Mouse Up
A Mouse Up action will be performed when the left mouse
button is released from the object in runtime.
Mouse Enter
A Mouse Enter action will be performed when the cursor enters
the boundaries of an object in runtime.
Mouse Leave
A Mouse Leave action will be performed when the cursor leaves
the boundaries of an object in runtime.
For iX TxA and iX TxB targets the object boundaries are not adapted to the
visible outline of the shape. Instead the active area of the object is extended to a
rectangular box. This will result in a mouse action as soon as the mouse pointer is
placed inside the rectangular bounding box of the object:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
243
Ribbon Tabs
8.8.3
Function Key Action Triggers
The Key Down and Key Up action triggers can be used to create two-step actions
for function keys.
Parameter
Description
Key Down
A Key Down action will be performed when a function key is
pressed in runtime.
Key Up
A Key Up action will be performed when a function key is
released in runtime.
8.8.4
Value Changed Action Triggers
Parameter
Description
Input Value
Changed
The Input Value Changed action will be performed when a value
is entered by the operator.
Value Changed
The Value Changed action will be performed when the value of
the object has changed.
8.8.5
Focus Action Triggers
Parameter
Description
Got Focus
The Got Focus action will be performed when the object is
selected.
Lost Focus
The Lost Focus action will be performed when the object is no
longer selected.
8.8.6
Navigation Action Triggers
Parameter
Description
Navigated
The Navigated action will be performed when having navigated
to the address entered in the address field of the Web browser
object.
Navigating
The Navigating action will be performed when having entered,
but not reached, an address in the address field of the Web
browser object.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
244
Ribbon Tabs
8.8.7
Data Logger Action Triggers
The LogItemValueChanged and LogValuesUpdated are available for the Data
Logger.
8.8.8
Alarm Server Action Triggers
Alarm server actions can be configured for the entire alarm server, for alarm groups
or for individual alarm items. The actions will be activated upon alarm status
changes.
Related information
Alarm Server Events and Actions
Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups
8.8.9
Action Groups
Actions are divided into action groups.
Action group
Screen
Action
Close Screen
Description
Closes the current screen
If triggered from a tag in a popup screen,
this will close both the popup and the
parent screen.
Print Screen
Prints the current screen on printer or to a
.PNG file.
Selecting Print to file enables the following
options:
Project files folder: The file will be saved
in a folder named “Project Files” in the
projects execution path.
Browse: A save dialog will be shown in
runtime. (PC only).
Path: The file will be saved to a specified
path. (PC only).
Show Next Screen
Shows next screen
Show Previous Screen
Returns to previous screen
Show Screen
Shows the specified screen. If the screen is
a popup the position of the screen can be
defined by entering (X,Y) coordinates.
Show Start Screen
Shows the screen set to Startup screen
Address Book
Open Address Book
Opens the address book for editing. This
action is used for Alarm Distributor purposes.
Alarm
Distributor
Server
Open Print Settings
Modifies alarm distributor print settings
Open Routes
Configuration
Modifies routes for the distributed alarm
server
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
245
Ribbon Tabs
Action group
Alarm Viewer(1)
Audit Trail
Action
Description
Acknowledge All
Alarms
Acknowledges all alarms in all Alarm
Viewers
Acknowledge
Selected Alarm
Acknowledges the selected alarm in the
Alarm Viewer
Alarm Info
Performs the action configured for the
Alarm event info requested in the Alarm
Server. The action is performed on the
selected Alarm Viewer.
Clear All Alarms
Remove all alarms in all Alarm Viewers
Filter Alarms
Shows the filter configuration dialog for
the selected Alarm Viewer
Pause Viewer
Starts and pauses the selected Alarm
Viewer
Export Audit Trail
Database
Exports the audit trail database to a USB
stick (operator panel) or to a folder (PC).
When this is done the audit trail log is
cleared.
The export will be saved in a .SDF file.
Chart
Database
Pan Down
Pans down in selected chart
Pan Left
Pans left in selected chart
Pan Right
Pans right in selected chart
Pan Up
Pans up in selected chart
Reset View
Resets any panning and zoom in selected
chart
Zoom In
Zooms into selected chart
Zoom Out
Zooms out of selected chart
Backup Database
Performs a backup of the project database
Backup Database for
project restore
Performs a backup of the project database
to the memory card. This action can be
used when project is copied to memory
card, to update the database on the
memory card. When action is performed,
the existing database on the memory card
is replaced.
Only supported for iX TxA and iX TxB
targets.
Datalogger
Database Export
Exports selected database in csv format
Clear Datalogger
Clears the specified datalogger
Log Once
Makes the specified datalogger log once
Start Logging
Enables the specified datalogger
Stop Logging
Disables the specified datalogger
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
246
Ribbon Tabs
Action group
Output Devices
Recipe
Reporting
Action
Description
Email Configuration
Shows the e-mail configuration
page. This action is used for
Alarm Distributor purposes.
Printer Configuration
Shows the printer configuration page.
SMS Configuration
Shows the SMS configuration
page. This action is used for
Alarm Distributor purposes.
Delete Recipe
Deletes recipe
End Offline Recipe
Editing
Sets the tags in the specified recipe in
online mode.
Export Recipe
Exports a recipe to a .CSV file
Import Recipe
Imports a recipe from a .CSV file
Load Recipe
Loads recipe
Save Recipe
Saves recipe
Start Offline Recipe
Editing
Sets the tags in the specified recipe in
offline mode.
Generate Report
Generates a report file that can be output
to a printer or saved as an Excel file.
Selecting “File” enables the following
options:
Project files folder: The file will be saved
in a subfolder named ”Reports” in the
“Project Files” folder.
Browse: A save dialog will be shown in
runtime. (PC only).
Path: The file will be saved to a specified
path. (PC only).
Security
Export User Accounts
Exports user data to a location that the
operator states
Import User Accounts
Imports user data from a location that the
user states
Login
Displays a login dialog
Logout
Logs out the current user
Show Users Dialog
Displays a dialog where users can be
added, edited or removed
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
247
Ribbon Tabs
Action group
Tag
Trend Viewer
Action
Description
Clear Non-Volatile
Values
Clears all stored values for tags marked as
non-volatile
Decrement Analog(2)
Decrements tag value
Increment Analog(2)
Increments tag value
Reset Tag(2)
Resets tag to 0
Set Analog(2)
Sets tag to the specified value
Set String(2)
Sets tag to the specified string
Set Tag(2)
Sets tag to 1
Toggle Tag(2)
Toggles tag between 0 and 1
Show Trend Viewer
Legend
Displays the legend tool in the selected
trend viewer, with a possibility to show
and hide curves and to display values of a
specific trend viewer sample.
Trend Viewer History
The Trend Viewer History action includes
the following choices (all applicable to the
selected trend viewer):
On: Shows trend history from when
the action was triggered (including
offset settings made using trend viewer
dynamics).
Off: Returns to showing real time trend
viewer data.
Toggle: Allows entering and terminating
history mode using the same object (for
example a button).
Show Dialog: Lets the user select a period
of time, for which to show trend viewer
history.
Other
Change Active
Controllers
Defines which controllers are to be active
after having restarted the project
Run Script
Executes a script method saved in a script
module.
Close Application
Closes the runtime application.
Copy Debug Log to
USB Memory
Copies the debug log to a USB memory.
Disable Debug Logger
Disables the debug logger.
Enable Debug Logger
Enables the debug logger.
Run
Starts an external application
Scroll Left
Scrolls the screen carousel object left
Scroll Right
Scrolls the screen carousel object right
Set Date and Time
Allows changing date and time in the
operator panel
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
248
Ribbon Tabs
Action group
Action
Description
Set Language
Sets the language in the operator panel to
the selected language
Set Time Zone,
Region and Daylight
Saving
Allows changing time zone, region and
daylight saving settings in the operator
panel
Show Backlight
Settings
Allows changing backlight settings in the
operator panel
When approaching 0% backlight, changes
in brightness level may no longer be
noticeable in the panel.
Complete dimming (to 0%) is only possible
to achieve with the marine panel types,
such as iX T7AM and iX T15BM.
Show IP Settings
Shows the IP settings in the operator panel
(1)All Alarm Viewer actions must be associated with an Alarm Viewer in the same screen
as the object with the action configured. This also applies to actions that affect all
Alarms.
(2)This action can be used with Aliases.
8.8.10
Script Action
Script actions are used to execute script methods in script modules, triggered by
actions. Script modules in the project can be selected, and for each script module
all methods are listed along with their exposed parameters. Static methods are
not supported.
To apply a script to a selected object:
1. Go to the Actions group and select the appropriate action trigger.
2. Select action Run Script under Other.
3. Select one of the scripts from Script Modules.
4. This results in a list of available script methods for that specific script module.
Select script method.
5. The parameters for the script appears in a dialog with information about the
parameter name and type. Complete the settings by entering a tag or a fixed
value for each parameter, and click OK.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
249
Ribbon Tabs
The script action will now be executed when the object is triggered.
Note:
Script actions will have precedence over other script code for an object.
Related information
Script
8.8.11
Multiple Actions
Multiple actions can be configured by clicking small arrow in the lower right
corner of any action group.
Note the small arrow in the lower right corner
The properties window allows configuring and sorting additional actions. The
actions available depend of which object is selected in the screen prior to selecting
the Actions ribbon tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
250
Ribbon Tabs
After configuring multiple actions, this is indicated for the action group on the
Actions tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
251
Trend Viewer
9
Trend Viewer
This section describes the trend viewer object. Trend Viewers are used to present
chronological data from controller tags. The curves in a trend viewer can have
different sources of data.
The source of data can be a log item for a data logger. The values of the tag
connected to the log item is then stored in the projects database.
The source can also be a Tag. The trend viewer curve then only shows real-time
values and is stored in a RAM cache.
Related information
Database
Database Export
9.1
Defining Trend Viewer Objects
It is possible to define several independent trend viewer objects, in the same screen
or in different screens. The number of trend viewer curves is limited only by the
available amount of memory in the panel.
Note:
A large number of trend viewer pens and short sampling intervals may affect
communication performance.
Related information
Communication Performance
9.1.1
Adding a Trend Viewer Object
A trend viewer object is added to a screen from the Objects group on the Home
ribbon tab.
Settings for the trend viewer object are available from the General ribbon tab while
the trend viewer object is selected:
Curves Group
Trend viewer curves are defined using the Edit Curves control.
Parameter
Description
Add
Adds a new curve to the trend viewer object
Remove
Removes the selected curve from the trend viewer object
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
252
Trend Viewer
Parameter
Description
Name
The symbolic name of the curve. This name is shown if a
Trend Viewer Legend is used.
Tag
The tag to present values for
Log Item
The item to be logged
Expression
Expression on a curve is evaluated and applied when the
curve is drawn. If the expression value when the tag is
logged or cached is of interest, the expression on the log
item or the tag can be used. See section Expressions
Color
The color of the curve
Thickness
Line thickness
Minimum Value Tag
A tag that dynamically sets what value on the curve that
corresponds to the minimum value of the Y axis. This
property will scale the curve when the value of the tag is
different from the minimum value of the Y axis (optional).
Maximum Value Tag
The tag that dynamically sets what value on the curve
that corresponds to the maximum value of the Y axis. This
property will scale the curve when the value of the tag is
different from the maximum value of the Y axis (optional)
Dynamics Group
Several trend viewer properties can be made dynamic, i. e. dependent on tag
values. This may be useful, for example, when wanting to present trend viewer
values of different formats in the same trend viewer object.
If dynamic trend viewer properties are used, the corresponding property settings
made in the Value Scale group for the trend viewer object are ignored.
Parameter
Description
Value Scale Min / Value
Scale Max
Minimum/maximum value of the Y-scale. The design
mode value is used only for increased understanding in
design time when tag values do not affect the minimum
and maximum values.
Time Span
The time span of the X-axis in seconds.
Time Offset in History
Mode
Makes it possible to use an offset to step back in history
mode. The start value is when history mode was entered.
The unit is seconds.
If the Time Span value is increased, the trend viewer will initially display only the
previous number of entries (that was displayed before the increased time span).
It will not collect older data for display. Only when the additional time added
onto the time span has elapsed, the cache will be filled with data and a full curve
is displayed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
253
Trend Viewer
Value Scale Group
The value scale group controls the vertical scale (y-axis). If dynamic trend viewer
properties are used, the settings made for these properties in the value scale group
will be ignored.
Parameter
Description
Min Value/Max Value
Start/end value of scale
Major Ticks
Number of labeled scale marks on the scale
Minor Ticks
Number of scale ticks between two adjacent major ticks
Time Scale Group
Parameter
Description
Time Range
Visible time span for a trend viewer in Hour:Minute:Second
format. Allowed values range from 00:00:00 to 23:59:59.
Major Ticks
Number of labeled time marks. This property will be
ignored in Historical Mode in Trend Viewer.
Style Group
Parameter
Description
Style
Predefined graphical styles for the trend viewer
Visibility Group
Parameter
Description
Scale
When unchecked, the scale color of the trend is made
transparent. Scale color is set from Other Colors in the
Format group on the Home ribbon tab.
Grid
When unchecked, the grid color of the trend viewer is
made transparent. Grid color is set from Other Colors in
the Format group on the Home ribbon tab.
9.1.2
Trend Viewer Legend
In runtime, it is possible to display a trend viewer legend tool using the Show
Trend Viewer Legend action. The trend viewer legend tool is a floating window
that displays the name and color of the curves in the current trend viewer object.
Curves can be made invisible by clicking the visibility icon.
Use the needle directly in the trend viewer to select a specific occasion. The values
of all curves at the current position are displayed in the trend viewer legend tool.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
254
Trend Viewer
9.2
Historical Mode in Trend Viewer
To be able to show historical data in a trend viewer, the curves needs to be
connected to log items from a data logger.
To show trend viewer history, it is necessary to define trend actions to show and
close the historical trend viewer. These actions can for example be programmed as
button click actions. It is also possible to let the user select a time period.
Major ticks settings for time axis will be ignored in historical trend viewers. In
historical trend viewers the date and time will be viewed at start and end time. The
text “history” is visible in the middle of the time axis.
Related information
Performance in the operator panel
Database
Click Action Trigger
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
255
Data Logger
10
Data Logger
Data can be logged and saved in the iX Developer database.
Any number of tags can be connected to a data logger, and data values irrespective
of type can be logged. A project can have multiple data loggers with different
sampling alternatives.
When installing iX Developer, a Database Viewer is automatically installed and
available from Windows Start menu. The Database Viewer makes it possible to
open the database file and inspect logged data, and to export the file to Excel.
Logged data can also be viewed in the trend viewer object by selecting a LogItem
for a curve in the Edit Curves dialog.
If iX Runtime is restarted at some point during the data logging, an additional
empty row is added in the Data Logger table in order to clearly visualize the
interruption in the Trend Viewer.
Note:
Logging of data consumes system resources and memory. To save memory, it is
preferable that all LogItems that should be logged with the same sampling intervals are
placed in the same data logger.
Note:
In order to import or export .xls-files Microsoft Excel must be installed.
Any individual data logger database can be exported in csv format using the
Database Export action. It is recommended to use the database export method
rather than the backup method.
Related information
Database
Database Export
Adding a Trend Viewer Object
10.1 Data Logging Strategies
Logging of data can be made at time intervals or based on changed tag values.
Logging of data can be made either by collecting all samples at every log event, or
by collecting only changed values. Collecting only changed values saves memory
and improves performance.
10.1.1
Logging Based on Time Interval
To collect data that changes frequently, logging data based on time interval is
recommended.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
256
Data Logger
10.1.2
Logging Based on Changed Tag Value
To control sampling of data by other means than regular time interval, you have
to set up a separate tag to be used as a trigger. When the value of the trigger tag
changes the log item is logged.
10.1.3
Maximizing the Lifetime of the
Storage Media
The storage media in the iX panel is based on Flash SSD (Solid State Drive).
Flash SSD has no moving or mechanical parts, which gives high and reliable
performance. The Flash SSD can handle data very fast and efficiently and the
data is controlled by the drive manufacturers’ confidential algorithm. As the
algorithm is intellectual property it is not possible to calculate the lifetime, the
drive manufacturers only publish the numbers of reads and writes.
Best practise is to minimize number of writes to maximize the lifetime of the Flash
SSD. Follow the advice below to reduce the risk of premature wear out (before the
estimated lifetime). A non working Flash SSD stops the panel from operating.
•
Do not log values with higher accuracy than needed. For example, avoid
logging of floating point values.
•
Reduce high fluctuating values by using the hysteresis functionality in the
connected controller.
•
Collect values with high fluctuating values in the same logger and do not mix
with stable values. Collect slow changing values in other loggers.
•
Do not log with higher refresh rate than needed.
•
Disable logging completely when information is not needed, for example
when the machine is not running.
•
Use default setting Log changes only in the property setting of the logger.
•
Keep the log size to a minimum, as few rows as needed.
•
Avoid extensive file writing when controlling storage via script.
10.2 Adding a Data Logger
A data logger can be added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab. The data
logger configuration pages are used to set up which values to log.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
257
Data Logger
Parameter
Description
Name
Symbolic name for the logged tag
Tag
Tag to log
Expression
See section Expressions
Clicking the Settings button accesses the Data Logger settings.
Related information
General Settings
Actions
10.2.1
General Settings
Parameter
Description
Table name
The name of the data logger table. This name is the same
as the data logger name.
Log with interval
To collect data that changes frequently, use the Log with
interval of option, and define time interval in seconds.
Minimum interval is 1 second.
Log on tag event
To control sampling of data by other means than regular
time interval, select the Log on tag event option, and
select the tag to use as trigger. Data will be sampled when
the tag value changes.
Log changes only
By logging changes only saves memory. The option Log
changes only can be combined with either the “Log with
interval of” or the “Log on object event” option. Data
will only be logged if the value differs from the last logged
value.
Max number of logged
rows
The maximum number of tag values to save in the
database. When the number of collected items becomes
larger than the set value, the oldest item will be
overwritten. The value must be within the size of the
available amount of memory in the operator panel in
runtime.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
258
Data Logger
Related information
Database
Click Action Trigger
10.2.2
Actions
Event
Description
Log item Value
changed
When a value of an particular log item has changed
Log values updated
When any log value is updated
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
259
Scheduler
11
Scheduler
A scheduler is used to control tags in relation to the real-time clock. This function
is used to control events in the process, for example starting and stopping motors,
at specific predefined calendar times.
11.1 Scheduler Set Up
The scheduler configuration pages are used to set up scheduler jobs, which can
include a set of tags with associated start and stop times.
11.1.1
Adding a Scheduler
A scheduler can be added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab.
The scheduler configuration page will open in the desktop when a scheduler
function is created or selected.
Parameter
Description
Name
A symbolic name for the scheduled event.
Period
Set to Once (default) or to a regular interval (every
minute, hour, day, week, month or year).
Start Date/Start Time
The date and time for the first scheduled event.
Duration
The length of the event.
Tag
A digital tag, which is set to 1 during the specified interval.
Stop Time Enable
When checked, Stop Date and Stop Time, instead of
Duration, can be used to determine the end of the event.
Stop Date/Stop Time
The end date and time of the event. Also resets the defined
Tag to 0. Used when Stop Time Enable is checked.
Action
Click the button to configure an action to be performed
when the scheduled event is activated/deactivated.
Note:
Make sure not to use the same trigger tag for two different schedulers. When the first
scheduler is finished, its trigger tag is reset, and the second scheduler will not be
triggered.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
260
Reports
12
Reports
The report generator allows generating Excel reports based on an Microsoft Excel
made report template.
The generated report can be output to a printer or saved as an Excel file.
12.1 Reports Template Set up
The tag data to be displayed in the report file are set up in the template file using
“placeholders”.
The placeholders acts as substitute for the actual tag data that is to be inserted
when the report is generated in iX Runtime.
To add a placeholder, enter the following text inside a cell in the Excel report
template:
<#Tag(TagName)>
Replace “TagName” with the actual name of the tag to be displayed.
When the template file is complete it needs to be added to the iX Developer
project.
Note:
The tag placeholders can only be used in the cells of the Excel template file, they can
not be used in, for example, Microsoft Excel WordArt texts.
12.1.1
•
•
•
•
Limitations
Microsoft Excel xlsx format is not supported by the report generator.
Microsoft Excel xls format only supports 65536 rows. If more data is stored in
the report, information may be lost.
Reports containing charts and pictures can not be printed from a panel target.
The report generation is not an instant process. It may elapse a shorter period
of time between the first sampled tag and the last sampled tag, depending on
the number of tags to process.
12.1.2
Database Driven Reports
To be able to create database driven reports, the report template must be prepared
as described in these instructions:
Configuration Sheet
The configuration sheet is a repository where configurations on the Microsoft
Excel report template can be made. This sheet will not be visible in the generated
report.
1. Create a new worksheet in the report template. Name the sheet <#Config>.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
261
Reports
2. Row 10, and all rows below, in column A and B can be used to configure the
SQL queries. Enter the SQL query in column B. Use the corresponding cell in
column A to enter a name for the query. The name will be used to refer to the
query in the report template.
Enter the SQL queries in the following format:
SQL(DatabaseName; SQL query)
Example: SQL(General; SELECT * FROM DataLogger1)
There are two available databases: General and AuditTrail.
Present the Database Data in the Report
The data retrieved from the SQL database, using the queries in the configuration
sheet, can be presented in the report using “named ranges” in Microsoft Excel.
A named range is created in Microsoft Excel by following these steps:
1. Select the cells to be included in a named range.
2. Click the Define name command from the Insert menu. (In Excel 2007, go
to the Formulas tab and choose Name Manager).
3. Enter a name for the range. The name must be entered in the following
format:
“__QueryName__”.
Replace “QueryName” with the name that you have chosen for your SQL
query.
To present the data in the report, enter the following syntax into the cells included
in the named range:
<#QueryName.DatabaseColumnName>
Replace the “DatabaseColumnName” entry with the actual name of the table in
the SQL database that you wish to present in the report.
Note:
It is possible to use the named range cells in Microsoft Excel charts and functions.
To be able to use the named range in functions, an empty row must be inserted under
the named range cells. This empty row must also be included in the function.
Related information
Adding a Report
12.2 Reports Set Up
The reports configuration page are available from the Insert ribbon tab.
Related information
Insert Ribbon Tab
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
262
Reports
12.3 Adding a Report
Add a Microsoft Excel report template by pressing Add in the reports
configuration page. In the appearing Add report dialog, type in or browse to the
location of the Excel template file.
If any changes are made to a report template after it has been uploaded to the
project, the template has to be uploaded again.
The template files being added to the project must have unique file names.
Parameter
Description
Name
A symbolic name for the report.
File name
The name of the Microsoft Excel report template.
The Show Selection/Show All button can be used to set up a filter of displayed
items.
Related information
Performance in the operator panel
Filtering Items
Configuration Pages
Action Groups
Output Devices Group
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
263
Recipe Management
13
Recipe Management
Recipes make it possible for a set of tags to be saved in the operator panel to
be downloaded at later time. The operator can download a saved recipe to
the controller, which will start working with the new values. Recipe libraries
consisting of recipes with different sets of parameters can be created, allowing
reuse of large sets of parameters.
Recipes can be created during the design of the project or from the operator panel.
Recipe data is stored in the operator panel database. Recipe handling functions
such as loading, storing, copying and deleting recipes are handled with actions.
Related information
Database
Actions Ribbon Tab
13.1 Recipe Setup
Recipes consist of a set of recipe tags and of recipe data (values).
13.1.1
Adding a Recipe Manager
The recipe function is added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab. The
recipe configuration pages are used to manage tag sets and values via the Tag
Configuration tab and the Runtime Data tab.
Tag Configuration Tab
First add tags to be used by the recipe function from the tags configuration page.
Then define a set of recipe items on the Tag Configuration tab of the Recipe
function, and connect them to the tags you defined. The data type is already set in
the configuration of the tags.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
264
Recipe Management
Runtime Data Tab
The actual recipes are created under the Runtime Data tab. Give the recipe a title,
and type a value for each recipe item. A recipe can include a maximum of 256
items.
The recipe name has to be an alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter.
Name strings can contain letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscore (‘_’)
characters. Some system device names such as COM1 and AUX are invalid.
Related information
Invalid Names
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
265
Recipe Management
13.2 Recipes in the iX panel
Some recipe actions can be performed by the operator in runtime.
13.2.1
Loading Recipes
Recipes can be transferred to the controller using a Load recipe action when the
operator panel is running. This means that the recipe values are transferred to the
controller. A list of available recipes is displayed when the Load recipe action is
activated. Select a recipe in the list and press [Enter] to make the controller run
with the downloaded values.
13.2.2
Saving Recipes
The Save recipe action can be used when the operator panel is running. Tags
defined on the Tag Configuration tab are included in the recipe. Corresponding
tag values are stored in the selected recipe file when Save recipe is performed. It is
possible to define an explicit recipe, that will be overwritten if it already exists when
performing the Save Recipe action.
13.2.3
Creating Recipes in the iX panel
The Save recipe action is also used to create recipes in runtime. Instead of defining
an explicit recipe to overwrite, the recipe data field is left open. In this case, the
operator will be prompted to save the recipe with any name, or to overwrite an
existing recipe.
13.2.4
Editing Recipes Offline
It is possible to edit existing recipes in the panel without transferring values to the
controller, by setting the recipe tags in offline mode. Recipe tags in offline mode
will not receive any data from the controller, and no values will be written to the
controller.
In offline mode, the Load recipe and Save recipe actions will not affect values in
the controller.
Internal tags may be used for recipes, but will not be affected by offline mode.
Actions are used to start and end offline mode:
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
266
Recipe Management
Action
Description
Start offline recipe
editing
Sets the tags in the specified recipe in offline mode. A
notification message is shown.
End offline recipe
editing
Sets the tags in the specified recipe in online mode, and
the tags are updated from the controller.
A notification message is displayed during offline mode.
Example
1. Click Recipe on the Insert ribbon tab.
The Recipe configuration page opens in the desktop area.
2. Add recipe tags on the Tag Configuration tab of the Recipe configuration
page and connect them to controller tags.
3. Add a recipe on the Runtime Data tab.
4. Create a screen with four buttons.
5. Connect two of the buttons to the Load Recipe and Save Recipe actions.
Select the recipe title from the Runtime Data tab for Recipe Data.
6. Connect the other two buttons to the Start offline recipe editing and End
offline recipe editing actions.
7. Run the project and test the functionality:
a. Click Start offline recipe editing.
The tags are set in offline mode.
b. Click Start offline recipe editing.
The tags are filled with data from the recipe.
c. Change the data.
d. Click Save recipe.
The data in the tags is written to the recipe.
e. Click End offline recipe editing.
The tags are set in online mode and the values are updated with data from
the controller.
13.3 Recipe Export
A recipe can be exported as a .csv file and saved to a USB stick, an external memory
card or to the project files folder. The export is configured through the “Export
Recipe” action available from the Recipe action group.
Note:
Recipe export is not supported during project simulation.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
267
Recipe Management
13.3.1
Recipe Export from an operator
panel Target
It is possible to select Export to the Project Files Folder, Export to USB, or Export
to external memory card, and also to set another name of the export file.
It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or
semicolon).
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
268
Recipe Management
13.3.2
Recipe Export from a PC Target
It is possible to select Browse and Select an export path, Export to Path or the
Export to Project Files folder, and also setting another name of the export file.
The Browse and Select an export path option allows browsing for desired export
destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are
unknown when designing the project.
Select the Export to Path option when you want to set the path when designing the
project. If the pre-defined path is not valid in runtime, the operator may browse
the PC environment by clicking a browse button.
It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or
semicolon).
13.4 Recipe Import
A recipe that previously has been exported as a .csv file, can be imported back into
recipe database. The import is configured through the “Import Recipe” action
available from the Recipe Action group.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
269
Recipe Management
Note:
Recipe import is not supported during project simulation.
13.4.1
Recipe Import to an iX panel Target
It is possible to import the csv file using the Import from USB, Import from
external memory card or the Import from Project Files folder selections and also
setting the name of the import file.
It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or
semicolon).
It can be selected whether to ignore the new data or replace the old data, if the
recipe data already exists.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
270
Recipe Management
13.4.2
Recipe Import to a PC Target
It is possible to select Browse and Select a path for import file, Import from path
or Import from Project Files folder, and also setting the name of the import file.
The Browse and Select a path for import file option allows browsing for desired
import destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime
are unknown when designing the project.
Select the Import from path option when you want to set the path when designing
the project.
It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or
semicolon).
It can be selected whether to ignore the new data or replace the old data, if the
recipes already exists.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
271
Function Keys
14
Function Keys
Function keys can be configured to run actions or to run scripts.
14.1 Definitions
A standard PC keyboard has 12 function keys, F1 - F12.
A function key can be configured to affect only a particular screen or to be global.
Global function keys behave identically for all screens. A global definition can
always be accessed when the operator panel is running, provided that the current
screen does not have a screen definition for that function key. Screen function
keys have higher priority than global function keys. Function keys included in
background screens have lower priority than screen function keys, but higher
priority than global function keys.
For touch panel and PC targets, the Function keys function is added via the
Insert ribbon tab, and allows configuration of up to 24 function keys (even if the
connected keyboard does not support more than 12 function keys).
Related information
Security Management
14.2 Configuring Function Keys
Function keys can be configured to run actions or to run scripts.
14.2.1
Function Key Actions
To define function key actions:
1. Click on Function Keys in the Project Explorer to open the function keys
configuration page.
2. Select Global or Screen.
3. Select the function key to be defined.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
272
Function Keys
4. Click on the button next to the action to display the actions editor. Define the
action to be performed when the function key is pressed or released.
5. In the column Security groups required it is possible to specify security group
accessibility for the function key.
Multiple actions can be configured for a function key.
It is only possible to activate two tags connected to function keys at the same time.
This means that if more than two function keys are pressed at the same time, only
the first two will be activated.
Should further function key actions be needed in addition to those available for
the panel in question, this could be solved by adding buttons or other objects on
screen, connecting these to the desired actions.
Note:
The function keys will be disabled if the backlight of the panel is disabled.
Related information
Function Key Action Triggers
Multiple Actions
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
273
Function Keys
14.2.2
Function Key Scripts
To define a script for a function key:
1. Click on Function Keys in the Project Explorer to open the function keys
configuration page.
2. Select the function key to be defined.
3. Select script view mode by clicking Script in the lower part of the desktop area.
4. Click on the desired button node. Double-click on the KeyDown node. Edit
the script code to be performed.
Example:
The following C# code sets up function key F12 to perform an acknowledge of
all alarms:
Related information
Script
14.2.3
Momentary Function
In order to configure a function key with a momentary function, you need to
combine a Set Tag action for Key Down with a Reset Tag action for Key Up.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
274
Function Keys
Change of Screen During Momentary Execution
There are a few special cases to be aware of when, during execution of the
momentary function, another screen is opened that contains settings for the
function key in use.
Then, dependent on the Function Key Context settings, Global or Screen (local),
there will be different outcomes:
•
Case 1: A local function key is pressed.
A change to another screen occurs.
Result: The up action for the local key is executed. No new down or up
actions are executed on the second screen as long as the key is pressed.
•
Case 2: A global function key is pressed.
A change to another screen occurs, in which there is no local setting for the
same key.
Result: Nothing happens at screen change. The up action for the global key
is executed when the key is released.
•
Case 3: A global function key is pressed.
A change to another screen occurs, in which there is a local setting for the same
key.
Result: The up action for the global key is executed. No new down or up
actions are executed on the second screen as long as the key is pressed.
Note:
A Screen (local) function key command has priority over a Global function key
command.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
275
Alarm Management
15
Alarm Management
An alarm is used to call attention to an event that requires immediate action. An
alarm is set when a certain condition is met. An alarm condition is designed as a
logical evaluation of a tag value. Alarms can be divided into groups to create an
order of priority.
Alarm notification can be made in the following ways:
Alarm Indicator
Alarm Viewer
Distribution via SMS, e-mail or printer via the Alarm Distributor
The alarm server database can be exported in csv format using the Database
Export action.
Related information
Database Export
15.1 Alarm Conditions
Alarms can assume the following conditions:
Alarm condition
Description
Active
The alarm condition is met, and the alarm is not
acknowledged
Inactive
The alarm has returned to normal condition, but has not
been acknowledged
Acknowledged
The alarm condition is still met, but the alarm is
acknowledged
Normal
The alarm has returned to normal condition and has been
acknowledged
15.2 Alarm Server
The alarm server function is predefined in the Project Explorer. Clicking on it
opens the alarm server configuration pages in the desktop.
General alarm server properties are available by clicking the Settings button.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
276
Alarm Management
The Properties window is divided into General, Alarm Distribution and Actions.
15.2.1
General Settings
Settings
Some alarm server functions are based on changed tag values:
Alarm function
Description
Remote acknowledge
Performs remote acknowledge of all current alarms when
the tag value is 1
Clear alarms
Removes all alarms from the alarm server when the tag
value is 1
Enable/disable alarms
Enables the alarm server when the tag value is 1
Show Alarm Indicator
Select for which alarm statuses the alarm indicator is to be displayed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
277
Alarm Management
Log Settings
Parameter
Description
Max Number of Logged
Rows
The maximum number of alarms to save in the database. If
the number of collected items becomes larger than the set
value, the oldest item will be deleted. The value must be
within the size of the available amount of memory in the
operator panel in runtime.
Repeat Counter
To avoid that an alarm that is triggered repeatedly results in multiple entries in the
alarm list, Repeat Count can be used. The current alarm will then only appear
once in the alarm list, and number of times the alarm is triggered will be included
in the alarm text. For display in the Alarm Viewer and for logging, select whether
to show the time of the first or last occurrence of the alarm.
15.2.2
Alarm Server Events and Actions
Actions can be configured for the entire alarm server. One or multiple actions can
be configured when a particular alarm server event occurs.
Select Actions in the Alarm Server properties page to configure actions for the
alarm server.
Actions for the following alarm server events can be configured:
Alarm Acknowledge
The specified actions are triggered once for every alarm that is acknowledged.
Alarm Active
The specified actions are triggered once for every alarm that becomes active.
Alarm Deleted
The specified actions are triggered once when the Clear button in the Alarm
Viewer is pressed, if at least one alarm is deleted.
Alarm Event Info Requested
The specified actions for the selected alarm are triggered when the Info button in
the Alarm Viewer is pressed.
The actions are applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for
the alarm, the actions are applied for the group. If no action is specified for the
group, the actions are applied for the alarm server.
Alarm Inactive
The specified actions are triggered once for each alarm, for which the alarm
condition is no longer met.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
278
Alarm Management
Alarm Normal
The specified actions are triggered once for each acknowledged alarm, for which
the alarm condition is no longer met.
Alarms Changed
This event is intended primarily for scripting, in order to avoid performance
loss that may occur when many alarms change status at once. Alarms Changed
includes status changes based on Alarm Acknowledge, Alarm Active, Alarm
Normal and Alarm Inactive, but not Alarm Deleted.
The specified actions are triggered once when the status of several alarms change at
one occasion. A collection of alarms is returned.
Alarms Deleted
This event is intended primarily for scripting, in order to avoid performance
loss that may occur when many alarms are deleted at once, by pressing the Clear
button in the Alarm Viewer.
The specified actions are triggered once when a number of alarms are deleted at
one occasion. A collection of alarms is returned.
Any Acknowledged
The specified actions are triggered based on alarm logic: when the alarm server
toggles between containing acknowledged alarms or not.
Any Active
The specified actions are triggered based on alarm logic: when the alarm server
toggles between containing active alarms or not.
Any Inactive
The specified actions are triggered based on alarm logic: when the alarm server
toggles between containing inactive alarms or not.
15.2.3
Alarm Distribution Settings
To enable sending alarms to printer, or via SMS or e-mail, the Alarm Distributor
is used. In addition to the settings below, the Enable Distribution option for the
alarm groups or alarm items also has to be checked.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
279
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Internal/External
Selection of internal or external alarm distributor
IP Number Server
The IP address of the external alarm distributor
Queue Length
The number of alarms to be kept in queue for the external
alarm distributor. When the queue is full, no more alarms
will be added to the queue.
Port Number
The port number of the external alarm distributor
Related information
Alarm Distributor
Alarm Groups
Alarm Items
15.3 Alarm Indicator
As long as there are active alarms in the alarm server, the alarm indicator notify
window will be displayed, regardless of which screen is active. The color shows
the current alarm status, and can be configured for each of the alarm groups. The
indicator starts in the upper left corner of the screen in runtime, but can be moved
to any position on the monitor in runtime.
The appearance of the alarm indicator depends on the current alarm status. It
will show the most severe status of the alarms in the list. The Alarm Indicator
disappears when all alarms have been acknowledged, and all alarms have returned
to inactive status.
Select General settings in alarm server properties page to decide for which alarm
statuses to show the alarm indicator.
Alarm condition
Description
Default alarm
indication
Active
The alarm condition is met, and the alarm
is not acknowledged
Flashing red
Inactive
The alarm has returned to normal condition,
but has not been acknowledged
Flashing green
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
280
Alarm Management
Alarm condition
Default alarm
indication
Description
Acknowledged
The alarm condition is met, and the alarm
is acknowledged
Flashing green
Normal
The alarm has returned to normal condition,
and has been acknowledged
-
Related information
General Settings
15.4 Alarm Items
Alarm items are added from the Alarm Items tab of the alarm server configuration
pages.
Click Add to define a new alarm.
Parameter
Description
Name
Symbolic name for the alarm item that will show in an
Alarm Viewer.
Text
An optional alarm text that will be shown in the Alarm
Viewer. Parts of the text can be made dynamic by clicking
...
Tag
The tag (digital or analog), which generates the alarm
when it assumes the specified status.
Expression
See section Expressions
Condition
Equal to/Not equal to: The alarm is set when the value
of the tag is equal/not equal to the value specified in the
Trigger Value field.
Greater than/Less than: The alarm is set when the value
of the tag is greater/less than the value specified in the
Trigger Value field.
Equal to greater than/Equal to less than: The alarm is set
when the value of the tag is equal to or greater/less than
the value specified in the Trigger Value field.
Rising/Falling Edge: The alarm is set when the specified
tag goes to one/zero.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
281
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Trigger Value
Numeric value to trigger alarm with when:
<tag value> <condition> <trigger value> = true.
History
Specifies when the alarm is to be removed from the alarm
list. Checking this box means that the alarm will remain
in the list until the list is full. Leaving it unchecked means
that the alarm will be removed from the list when it is
acknowledged and no longer active. If Acknowledge
Required is not checked, the alarm will be removed from
the list as soon as it is no longer active.
Acknowledge
Required
Indicates whether the alarm is to be acknowledged or
not. Checking the box means that the alarm must be
acknowledged, leaving it unchecked means that the alarm
returns to normal directly when the alarm status becomes
inactive.
Remote Acknowledge
A digital tag that acknowledges all the alarm when set to 1
Remote Ack
Expression
See section Expressions
Enable Distribution
Enables distribution of the alarm via printer/SMS/e-mail.
Only available if alarm distribution is enabled for the alarm
server. If the Enable Distribution option for the alarm
group is checked, distribution of individual alarms in the
group are automatically enabled.
Repeat Count
To avoid that an alarm that is triggered repeatedly results
in multiple entries in the alarm list, Repeat Count can be
used. The current alarm will then only appear once in the
alarm list, and the number of times the alarm is triggered
will be included in the alarm text. It is also possible to show
a Count column in the Alarm Viewer. The active time can
be shown either for the first time or for the last time the
alarm occurred.
Action
Makes it possible to configure one or multiple actions when
a particular alarm event occurs for the current alarm.
Note:
An alarm condition is triggered by a fixed value. The trigger value defined for an analog
alarm tag cannot be controlled from a register. It is not supported to trigger alarms
on intervals.
Related information
Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups
15.4.1
Exporting and Importing Alarm
Items
Alarm items can be exported and imported using the Import/Export button in the
Alarms configuration page. The procedure is similar to exporting and importing
tags.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
282
Alarm Management
Related information
Importing and Exporting Tags
Tag Import Example
15.5 Alarm Groups
Alarms can be divided into groups, for example to indicate the priority of the
alarms. One alarm group is defined by default.
Color attributes can be individually set for each alarm group. Alarms can be sorted
by group in the Alarm Viewer.
15.5.1
Defining Alarm Groups
Alarm groups are added from the Alarm Groups tab of the alarm server
configuration pages.
Parameter
Description
Name
An optional name for the alarm group.
Text
An optional text for the alarm group.
Colors
Select foreground and background color for each alarm
status
Remote
Acknowledge
A digital tag that acknowledges all the alarms in the group
when set to 1
Remote Ack
Expression
See section Expressions
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
283
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Enable Distribution
Enables distribution of the alarms in the group via
printer/SMS/e-mail. Only available if alarm distribution is
enabled for the alarm server.
Action
Makes it possible to configure one or multiple actions when a
particular alarm event occurs for the current alarm group.
Note:
The Alarm Filter will revert to the default settings if the Alarm Group is renamed.
Related information
Actions and Events for Alarm Items and Alarm Groups
15.6 Actions and Events for Alarm Items
and Alarm Groups
Actions can be configured for individual alarms or for alarm groups. One or
multiple actions can be configured when a particular alarm event occurs for the
current alarm or alarm group.
Actions for individual alarms are configured from the Action column for the alarm
on the Alarm Items tab.
Actions for alarm groups are configured from the Action column for the alarm
group on the Alarm Groups tab.
15.6.1
Actions and Events
Actions for the following alarm events and alarm group events can be configured:
Alarm Acknowledge
The specified actions will be triggered when the selected alarm/an alarm in the
selected alarm group is acknowledged.
Alarm Active
The specified actions will be triggered when the selected alarm/an alarm in the
selected alarm group becomes active.
Alarm Event Info Requested
The specified actions are triggered when the Info button in the Alarm Viewer is
pressed.
These actions are applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for
the alarm, the actions are applied for the group. If no action is specified for the
group, the actions are applied for the alarm server.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
284
Alarm Management
Alarm Inactive
The specified actions are triggered when the alarm/an alarm in the selected alarm
group becomes inactive.
15.6.2
Example
The following picture shows two actions configured for when the current alarm
goes active, and another action for when the operator presses the Info button in
runtime.
15.7 Remote Alarm Server
The alarm server in the iX Developer project can operate as a stand-alone alarm
server, processing alarms and showing these in the Alarm Viewer and alarm
indicator. Alternatively, the alarm server can distribute alarms to clients. Each
alarm server can function as alarm server and/or alarm client. The remote alarm
server functionality is set up via properties.
15.7.1
Remote Alarm Server Limitations
Most functions work exactly the same regardless if a local or remote alarm server
is used, but there are a few limitations:
•
In projects where multiple languages are used, switching language in the
alarm server results in using the current language for all new alarm texts.
Alarms distributed before the language was switched in the server will remain
in the previous language in the client.
•
Pressing the Info button in the Alarm Viewer in runtime does not result in any
actions for a remote alarm, unless the same project is used for the server and
the client. The script event AlarmInfoRequested can be used instead.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
285
Alarm Management
•
Unless the same project is used for the server and the client, filtering (pressing
the Filter button in the alarm viewer) can only be made in runtime for remote
alarms, since the remote server may include e.g. alarm groups that are
different from the project in which the alarm viewer was configured.
15.7.2
Remote Alarm Server Properties
The following properties, located in the Server Mode group under the Settings
button, need to be set up for the remote alarm server:
Property
Description
Maximum number
of alarm events to
distribute
The number of events to distribute to the clients. The
number of distributed alarms affects performance.
Server Mode
The alarm server can assume the following modes:
Disabled: The alarm server is disabled and no alarms are
processed
Local: The alarm server processes alarms of its own.
Remote: Alarms are distributed to remote clients.
Both: The alarm server processes alarms of its own and also
distributes them to remote clients
Server Port
15.7.3
Any available port. The port needs to correspond to the port
setting for the remote alarm client.
Remote Alarm Client
The properties for the remote alarm client are set by adding the Alarm Distributor
Viewer object, found in the Objects group under the Home tab.
The settings are done in the Property Grid under Extended.
Property
Description
Server address
The IP address of the remote alarm server.
Server port
Any available port. The port needs to correspond to the
port setting for the remote alarm server.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
286
Alarm Management
15.8 Alarm Distributor
The Alarm Distributor makes it possible to send alarm notification via printer,
SMS or e-mail. The function can be enabled internally in a project, or in another
operator panel that acts as a server towards several connected clients. Regardless
of acting as server or client, distributed alarms are saved temporarily in the local
project database to ensure that information is not lost in case of e.g. interrupted
power. After receiving alarms from a client, the server will send a confirmation to
the client. The alarms will then be removed from the client’s database.
15.8.1
Alarm Distribution Roles
Using Internal Alarm Distribution Server Functions
(Acting as Client and Server)
The following actions are required for using distributed alarm functions in the
current project:
Action
Component
Location
Activating distribution of
alarms in the project
Alarm Distribution
Server
Insert ribbon tab
Enabling internal
distribution of alarms
Alarm Server
Settings button/Alarm
Distribution properties
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
287
Alarm Management
Action
Component
Location
Enabling distribution of
alarm groups or individual
alarms
Alarm Server
Alarm Groups or Alarm
Items tab
Configuration of alarm
distribution routes
Alarm Distribution
Server
Receivers, Alarm Filter
and Scheduler tabs
Configuration of alarm
distribution devices
Alarm Distribution
Server
Configure Distribution
Devices button (e-mail,
printer and/or SMS)
Using External Alarm Distribution Server Functions
(Acting as Client)
The following actions are required for using distributed alarm functions in
another operator panel/PC project:
Action
Component
Location
Activating distribution of
alarms in the project
Alarm Distribution
Server
Insert ribbon tab
Enabling external
distribution of alarms
Alarm Server
Settings button/Alarm
Distribution properties
Enabling distribution of
alarm groups or individual
alarms
Alarm Server
Alarm Groups or Alarm
Items tab
Collecting Alarms for Distribution (Acting as Server)
The following actions are required for using distributed alarm functions in
another operator panel/PC project:
Action
Component
Location
Activating distribution of
alarms in the project
Alarm Distribution
Server
Insert ribbon tab
Configuration of alarm
distribution routes
Alarm Distribution
Server
Receivers, Alarm Filter
and Scheduler tabs
Configuration of alarm
distribution devices
Alarm Distribution
Server
Configure Distribution
Devices button (e-mail,
TCP server, printer and/or
SMS)
15.8.2
Adding an Alarm Distributor
The Alarm Distributor can be added to the project from the Insert ribbon tab. The
configuration pages are opened in the desktop area.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
288
Alarm Management
Route
A route defines a number of filtering rules for distribution of alarms. Multiple
routes makes it possible to send different kinds of notifications to various receivers.
Receivers Tab
The receivers of distributed alarms for each route are set up on the Receivers tab.
Address Book
Click on the Address Book button to enter names, e-mail addresses and/or phone
numbers of the persons that are to be available for selection for distributed alarm
messages.
The Show Selection/Show All button can be used to set up a filter of displayed
items.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
289
Alarm Management
The contents of the address book can be exported as a .csv file, and then be
imported again after modification using the Import/Export button.
Related information
Filtering Items
Receiver Selection
Click on the Receiver Selection button to set up receivers of each alarm
distribution route; via e-mail, SMS and/or printer.
The selected receivers are displayed under Receivers.
Alarm Filter Tab
Filtering of each alarm distribution route can be configured on the Alarm Filter
tab. The filtering operates using “and” logic, i.e. the alarm will only be distributed
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
290
Alarm Management
if all conditions are fulfilled. An empty string does not generate a filter condition
(acts as a “wild card”).
Parameter
Description
Alarm Name
The alarm item to distribute.
Alarm Group
The alarm group of which alarm items are to be
distributed.
Alarm Text
All alarms including this text will be distributed.
Alarm Status(es) to
distribute
Selection of alarm to be distributed, based on alarm
status. At least one status must be selected.
Scheduler Tab
Scheduling of each alarm distribution route can be configured on the Scheduler
tab. Only alarms that occur between the start and stop times will be distributed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
291
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Period
Select daily or weekly alarm distribution
Day
Select weekday, if Weekly was selected for Period
Start Time/Stop Time
Select start and stop time of the alarm distribution
Name
The name is automatically filled in based on start and stop
time, and cannot be edited
15.8.3
Configure Distribution Devices
Click the Configure Distribution Devices button to set up the different devices.
Related information
Modifying Alarm Distribution Settings in Runtime
Alarm Variables
Variables collected from the alarm server definitions can be included in distributed
alarm information. Variables are enclosed by curly brackets; for example “Alarm
text: {3}”. The following variables can be used:
Number
Variable
Description
0
State
The current state of the alarm
1
StateTime
The time the alarm entered the current state
2
AlarmId
A unique alarm ID
3
AlarmText
Alarm item text
4
AlarmItemDisplayName
Alarm item name
5
Count
The number of times the alarm has occurred
6
ActiveTime
The time the alarm became active
7
InactiveTime
The time the alarm became inactive
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
292
Alarm Management
Number
Variable
Description
8
NormalTime
The time the alarm became normal
9
AcknowledgeTime
The time the alarm was acknowledged
10
AlarmGroupName
Alarm group name
11
AlarmGroupText
Alarm group text
E-mail Device
Parameter
Description
From Name
The name of the sender of the e-mail
From E-mail Address
The e-mail address of the sender of the e-mail
SMTP Server Name/IP
The name or IP address of the SMTP server for sending
e-mail
Port
The port number of the e-mail server
Encryption Mode
Select None, ImplicitSSL or ExplicitSSL
Advanced Encryption
Clear the check box to use only RSA encryption.
Select the check box to use advanced encryption, like DSS,
DHE and DH (1).
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
293
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Code Page
The code page consists of a table of values that describes
the character set for a particular language. The default
code page in iX Developer is 65001 (UTF-8).
Authentication Mode
Select None or Authenticated Login
User Name/Password
User name and password if Authenticated Login was
selected
Retry Sending
Number of retries if the e-mail cannot be delivered
Time Interval
Number of seconds between retries
Subject
The e-mail subject; Alarm Variables can be used
Body
The e-mail body; Alarm Variables can be used
(1) Note that using Advanced Encryption has a negative effect on the performance
on CE targets.
Printer Device
Parameter
Description
Buffer settings
Set up the printers buffer settings
Text Font Size
The font size of the text to be printed
Body
The body of the printout; Alarm Variables can be used
Related information
Output Devices Group
SMS Device
To be able to send alarms via SMS, you have to purchase an SMS Gateway Service.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
294
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Basic URL for web SMS
The URL configuration string according to the SMS Gateway
Service supplier that must include two variables: {0} for
telephone number and {1} for SMS body
Retry Sending
Number of retries if the SMS cannot be delivered
Time Interval
Number of seconds between retries
Body
The SMS body; Alarm Variables can be used
TCP Server
Define the TCP server port. This must correspond to the port defined for the
Alarm Distribution settings for the alarm server.
15.9 Alarm Distributor Viewer
The Alarm Distributor Viewer is a debug tool, used for test and verification of the
alarm distribution setup.
Clicking the Settings button in runtime makes it possible to edit the address book
and make settings for alarm distribution.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
295
Alarm Management
Related information
Modifying Alarm Distribution Settings in Runtime
15.10 Alarm Viewer
The Alarm Viewer can be used to show more detailed alarm information than the
alarm indicator. Alarms presented in the Alarm Viewer presents alarm texts from
the alarm server. The alarm list shows the latest alarms. It is arranged in alarm
group order.
The default design of the alarm viewer depends on the size of the selected operator
panel target, in order to allow full visibility and usability of the alarm viewer in the
smaller operator panels.
Settings such as font and button width are available in the Property grid.
The colors of the Alarm Viewer object can be set from the Property grid. The
colors of the different alarm statuses are set in the Alarm Server settings.
If millisecond resolution is needed for the alarm timestamps, then this can be
activated using Show Milliseconds in the General tab in the Ribbon or under
Extended in the Property grid.
Note:
Some of the color effects require that Vista Style is activated under Extended in the
property grid (default setting).
Settings for the Alarm Viewer are available from the General ribbon tab while the
object is selected:
15.10.1
Buttons Group
Parameter
Description
Position
Controls to which of the borders the buttons will line up
Acknowledge Selected
Acknowledges the selected alarm in the Alarm Viewer
Acknowledge All
Acknowledges all alarms in all Alarm Viewers
Clear
Removes all alarms in all Alarm Viewers
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
296
Alarm Management
Parameter
Description
Filter(1)
Shows the filter configuration dialog for the selected Alarm
Viewer
Info
Performs the action set by Alarm Event Info Requested
Play/Pause
Starts and pauses the selected Alarm Viewer
Enable Context Menu
Shows Alarm Viewer commands in context menu in runtime
(1)Not supported in keyboard operated panels
15.10.2
Display Settings Group
Parameter
Description
Configure Columns
Selection and configuration of columns to display in runtime
Filter Settings(1)
Filter alarm statuses to display in runtime
Max Number of Rows
The maximum number of alarms to display. If the number
of alarms does not fit in the object in runtime, scroll bars
will be made available. If the number of alarms exceeds
the maximum number, the oldest item will be deleted.
Show Column Headers
Shows/hides the alarm viewers column headers
Show Summary
Shows status information in the bottom of the Alarm
Viewer
(1)Not supported in keyboard operated panels
15.10.3
Alarm Viewer Commands
In addition to using the Alarm Viewer buttons, the same functions are available
using actions.
Related information
Script
Property Grid
15.11Alarm Management in Runtime
Alarm notification can be made in the following ways:
Alarm Indicator
Alarm Viewer
Distribution via SMS, e-mail or printer via the Alarm Distributor
15.11.1
Alarm Acknowledgement
An alarm can be acknowledged in the following ways:
•
right-clicking on the alarm line and selecting Acknowledge
•
selecting the alarm line and pressing on the Acknowledge Selected button
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
297
Alarm Management
•
•
pressing the Acknowledge All button to acknowledge all current alarms
script actions
Inactive alarms that have been acknowledged can be removed from the list by
pressing the Clear button.
15.11.2
Sorting
Pressing on the column heading in runtime sorts the alarm list by that column.
This pauses the Alarm Viewer.
15.11.3
Filtering
Pressing the Filter button in the Alarm Viewer opens a dialog that allows the user
to enter a filtering profile to control which alarms to display in the alarm list.
Filtering can be made based on any combination of the following conditions:
•
Alarm group: The first column in the filter window shows the alarm group
name. Check the Enable box to show alarms from the group.
•
Alarm status: Displays alarms with the status corresponding to the checked
status values.
Note:
The Alarm Filter will revert to the default settings if the Alarm Group is renamed.
15.11.4
Play/Pause Button
The Alarm Viewer window can be paused from being updated with incoming
alarms using the Play/Pause button. This allows the operator to inspect and sort
the list without interference from any incoming alarms. The list also pauses when
an alarm is selected.
The alarm list starts updating again when
•
the Play button is pressed
•
the operator changes screen and returns to the same screen (or goes to another
screen showing the Alarm Viewer)
•
after a 5 minute time-out
15.11.5
Info Button
Pressing the Info button in the Alarm Viewer triggers the action specified in the
Alarm Event Info Requested group on the Actions tab, when an item in the alarm
server is selected.
Any action in the list can be selected.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
298
Alarm Management
This action will be applied for the individual alarm first. If no action is specified for
the alarm, the action will be applied for the group. If no action is specified for the
group, the action will be applied for the alarm server.
Related information
Alarm Groups
Alarm Conditions
Alarm Event Info Requested
15.11.6
Modifying Alarm Distribution
Settings in Runtime
It is possible to configure actions, or to use the Alarm Distribution Viewer to
modify the address book and alarm distribution settings in runtime.
Note:
If the Alarm Distribution Viewer or alarm distribution actions are used in runtime, it is
possible that alarm distribution settings have been modified. Next time you download
a project to the operator panel, you will get a notification, and selection to overwrite
panel settings or not.
Related information
Address Book Action Groups
Output Devices Action Groups
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
299
Security Management
16
Security Management
Using security groups and passwords in the operator panel makes it possible to
create a security system for the project. Operators can easily be assigned different
authorizations in the project to restrict access to objects and functions. Security
group information and passwords are stored in the project database.
It is not necessary to use this function if unrestricted access is acceptable. The
security function is a predefined component of the Project Explorer.
16.1 General Security Settings
General settings for the security function are available by clicking on Security in
the Project Explorer, selecting the Users tab and clicking the Settings button.
Parameter
Description
Select action on
access denied
When a users’s access rights are not sufficient to e.g. modify an
object or carry out an action, it is possible to display an access
denied message or opening a login dialog. Selecting None
performs no action.
Select visibility
When a user with insufficient access rights tries to affect an
object, it is possible to specify visibility for those objects:
Disabled: Only users with sufficient access rights can affect
the object. The object is visible, but disabled, for users with
insufficient access rights.
Hidden: Only users with sufficient access rights can see the
object. The object is invisible for users with insufficient access
rights
Normal: Only users with sufficient access rights can affect the
object. The object looks normal for users with insufficient
access rights
Automatic logout
Checking the box makes it possible to log out users
automatically after a certain number of minutes of inactivity.
After an automatic logout is executed, a screen jump to the
start screen will be performed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
300
Security Management
Note:
The automatic logout will not be carried out if a communication error (COM error)
is active in the panel. After removing the communication error from the panel, the
automatic logout will be performed within the specified time, calculated from when
the communication was reestablished.
16.1.1
Password Rules Properties
Allows setting a minimum number of characters for passwords.
Related information
Logging In and Logging Out
16.2 Security Groups
Security groups are defined on the Groups tab of the security configuration page.
When objects and screens have been set up with restricted access, the current
user must belong to a specific security group in order to control or see the object
or screen.
16.2.1
Creating Security Groups
A new security group in a project is defined by clicking on Security in the Project
Explorer, selecting the Groups tab and clicking Add.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
301
Security Management
Parameter
Description
Name
Any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z)
Users
Selection of users defined on the Users tab to be included
in the group
Users Invisible in
Runtime
When the box is checked, the users in the current group
will not be available for selection from the Login dialog in
runtime. It will still be possible to type in the user name
and password to login.
operator panel targets only: In order to enable the
possibility to manually enter a user name and password, it
is necessary to click the “Login” header on the Login dialog
in runtime. Doing so and then clicking on the User—field
will present the user with a keyboard on which a user name
can be entered.
16.3 Users
Users and passwords for login are defined on the Users tab of the security
configuration page.
Parameter
Description
Name
Any alphanumeric string, beginning with a letter (a-z, A-Z)
Password
Any alphanumeric string; minimum length according to
Password Rules properties. The password is converted to
asterisks as you leave the password input cell.
Description
An optional description of the user
Groups
Selection of security groups for the user
It is also possible to add users and change passwords directly in a running project,
using the Show Users Dialog action.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
302
Security Management
16.3.1
Logging In and Logging Out
The login dialog can be displayed in runtime by, for example, clicking a button,
for which the Login action has been specified. It is possible to change password
from the login dialog.
The login dialog lists all users that have been configured for the current project,
except for users in groups for which Users Invisible in Runtime was selected.
It is also possible to configure a general behavior that brings up the login dialog any
time a user tries to affect an object that is not within the current user’s access rights.
This behavior is configured from the Properties window for the Security function,
and selecting ShowLoginDialog for action on access denied.
The Logout action is used to perform a logout.
Users may also be logged out automatically after a certain number of minutes of
inactivity by configuring Automatic logout in the Properties window for the
Security function.
Note:
After logging out, the function Show Previous Screen for function keys and touch
keys will be ignored. This is a security feature to prevent unauthorized persons from
accessing screens protected by passwords.
Related information
General Security Settings
Actions Ribbon Tab
16.4 Object Security and Visibility
Object access can be restricted to a certain security group. Each security group
contains a set of users and each user has an individual password. To be able to
control an object with a security setting, the user must belong to the defined
security group, and has to login.
Object security is controlled by selecting the object, and then opening the
Tag/Security group of the Home or General ribbon tabs.
When no security is set for an object, the object will be available to everyone, i.e.
login will not be requested.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
303
Security Management
Note:
Security has higher priority than dynamics.
It is not possible to set security on function keys.
The visibility and behavior settings specified in the security manager will be used
when a security group is set but no explicit visibility is specified. The following
options can be set:
Visibility
Description
Default
The object looks normal and is visible for anyone.
Disabled
Only users in the selected security groups can affect the
object. The object is visible but disabled and greyed out,
for users with insufficient access rights.
Hidden
Only users in the selected security groups can see the
object. The object is invisible for users with insufficient
access rights.
Normal
Only users in the selected security groups can affect the
object. The object looks normal for users with insufficient
access rights.
Related information
Tag/Security Group
Function Keys
Screen Security
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
304
Language Management
17
Language Management
iX Developer supports multilingual applications. Translation of texts and system
texts can be performed directly in the application, or via export to a text file to
be translated in other software. The file is imported to the application after
translation.
The application language can be changed in runtime, for example based on a tag
value.
17.1 Setting Up Multiple Languages
The multiple languages function is included in the application by default and is
located in the Functions folder in the Project Explorer.
The multiple languages configuration pages consist of the Texts, System Texts
and Languages tabs.
17.1.1
Adding Languages
1. Click on the Multiple Languages function to open its configuration pages.
2. Select the Languages tab.
3. Add languages by selecting them from the drop-down list.
The Use in Runtime setting makes the language available in runtime. Under
Keyboard Layout, it is possible to select different layouts for the virtual keyboard,
used for alphanumerical input in runtime.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
305
Language Management
Note:
The size of the virtual keyboards vary between languages.
Examples of keyboard sizes (the values are approximative)
•
•
•
•
•
Arabic: 18 MB
Chinese - simplified: 12 MB
Hebrew: 6 MB
Korean: 21 MB
Latin alphabets: 0.1 MB.
Each added language is assigned an index number. Index number 0 is reserved for
the default language (the language that the application was first created in).
The Add and Delete buttons can be used to add and delete languages.
The Settings button allows connecting the language to a tag. This makes it
possible to change the project language based on a changed value.
Use the Show Selection/Show All button if you want to filter the languages in the
current view.
Related information
Virtual Keyboard
Filtering Items
17.2 System Texts
System texts belong to functions (e.g. alarm server or security), to the system
(e.g. time zone) and to objects (e.g. buttons or sliders), excluding text that the
developer has entered.
Select the System Texts tab in the Multiple Languages configuration pages to edit
system texts.
Several preinstalled translations of the system texts are available for selection:
•
English
•
German
•
French
•
Brazilian Portuguese
•
Chinese, traditional
•
Chinese, simplified
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
306
Language Management
Use the Show Selection/Show All button if you want to filter the current view.
The Import/Export button can be used to export a system language to a text file
for translation, and then import the language after translation.
Note:
Regional expressions for time, date, and weekdays are by default equal to the settings
in the system account, but can to some extent be changed in the Date, Time and Region
Group under the System Ribbon tab.
Related information
Filtering Items
Exporting Languages
Importing Languages
Date, Time, and Region Group
17.3 User Texts
Texts that have been added to objects by the developer are available from the
Texts tab in the Multiple Languages configuration pages. The texts in the default
language can be edited as well.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
307
Language Management
Use the Show Selection/Show All button if you want to filter the current view.
The Import/Export button can be used to export a system language to a text file
for translation, and then import the language after translation.
Note:
When an object is connected to a text in the Text library, the object’s internal
denomination (that is not displayed in runtime) will be presented in grey color in the
Texts list, to indicate that editing the text will not affect the runtime project.
Related information
Filtering Items
Exporting Languages
Importing Languages
Text Library
17.4 Text ID
The Text ID function is available from the Text IDs tab on the Multiple
Languages configuration page.
To enable the Text ID function, check the “Text IDs enabled” checkbox on the
Text IDs tab.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
308
Language Management
The Text IDs tab consist of the following columns: Text ID, Default Text and one
column for each language. The text in the column Default Text corresponds to
the default language used in iX Developer.
Clicking Add adds a row with a Text ID that is equal to the highest existing Text
ID plus 1.
Use the Show Selection/Show All button if you want to filter the current view.
The Import/Export button can be used to export a system language to a text file
for translation, and then import the language after translation.
Related information
Screen Group
Filtering Items
Exporting Languages
Importing Languages
17.4.1
Text ID Browser
If the Text ID function is enabled, all text box controls in iX Developer, including
texts used in iX Runtime, will be replaced with the Text ID browser control.
The Text IDs are accessed from a popup list by clicking the combo box arrow next
to the Text ID browser control.
The Text ID browser consists of two tabs, one for using Text ID and one for using
Dynamic Text ID.
•
If the requested Text ID text is known in iX Developer, the Text ID tab should
be used.
•
If the requested Text ID text is to be decided dynamically in runtime, then the
Dynamic Text ID tab should be used.
Text ID
The popup list consist of the following columns: Text ID, Default Text and one
column for each language. Right-clicking the column header opens up a context
menu that lists all available columns. The context menu offers a possibility to
configure which columns to be displayed in the popup list.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
309
Language Management
Parameter
Description
Add
Adds a row with a Text ID that equals to the highest existing
Text ID plus 1
Reset
Removes the Text ID connection and the text falls back to
the previously unconnected text
OK
Connects the object text to the selected Text ID
Cancel
Closes the popup list. No changes are made.
When an object is connected to a Text ID, the displayed text in the Text ID
browser control will be presented in the following manner:
“Text ID – Text”
Text corresponds to the default language used in iX Developer.
When opening the popup list, the text field acts as a filter for the popup list.
The object itself will only show the corresponding text, without Text ID, which
is disabled for editing.
When the language in iX Developer or in iX Runtime is changed, a text connected
to a Text ID will be updated to the corresponding text entered in the Text IDs tab.
Dynamic Text ID
The Dynamic Text ID tab consist of two tabs — Tags and Aliases — and acts as a
normal tag/alias selector.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
310
Language Management
In addition, it is also possible for the graphical components to set a Default Value
Used in Design Mode. This value will be displayed in the object in designtime,
but not be used in runtime.
Parameter
Description
Add
Adds a tag/alias
Reset
Removes the Dynamic Text ID connection and the text
falls back to the previously unconnected text
OK
Connects the object text to the selected tag/alias
Cancel
Closes the popup list. No changes are made.
When an object is connected to a tag, the displayed text in the Text ID browser
control will be presented as “TagName”, where TagName is the name of the tag.
When an object is connected to an alias, the displayed text in the Text ID browser
control will be presented as “#AliasName”, where AliasName is the name of the
alias.
When configured, the tag value in runtime represents the key (Text ID) to the Text
ID table. The displayed text is the corresponding translation for current language
for the given key (Text ID). If the tag value is not found as a key in the Text ID
table, an empty text is displayed.
17.5 Automatic Translation
iX Developer includes a translation tool that uses Microsoft Translator (www.microsoft.com/translator) or Google Translate (translate.google.com) to offer quick
translations of user-defined texts or system texts. Due to license requirements you
have to sign up for an account at one of the translation providers to get the required
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
311
Language Management
keys. If no keys are entered iX Developer uses Microsoft Translator to translate a
limited number of words per month.
Note:
Automatic translations provide limited functionality; especially combination of words
or words with synonyms may be returned as incorrect translations.
The translation tool is available by clicking Translate on the Texts or System Texts
tabs of the Multiple Languages configuration pages. Each language is translated
separately.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
312
Language Management
Parameter
Description
Translation Provider
Select translation provider among available providers.
Microsoft Translator Client Id
Type a Client Id. You need to get an account on
Windows Azure Marketplace and subscribe to
Microsoft Translator API to get a Client Id and a Client
Secret.
Microsoft Translator Client Secret
Type a Client Secret key. You need to get an account
on Windows Azure Marketplace and subscribe to
Microsoft Translator API to get a Client Id and a Client
Secret.
Google user Key
Type a Public API Access Sever key. You need to create a
Google Developers account and use the product Google
Translate API to get the key.
Save Key
Saves the Microsoft Translator Id and Client Secret or the
Google user Key in your user profile on the development
PC.
Translatate from
Selection of source language for the translation operation;
the default language (reference language) or one of the
languages that have been added to the project.
Translate to
Selection of target language for the translation operation.
Reference Language
Select reference language; i.e. the language in which the
project was created.
Only translate items
that have not yet been
translated
Clear the check box to replace also already translated
items in the project.
Note:
Since the translation tool accesses online translation providers, the translation
operation may sometimes be paused or delayed due to an excess of online users.
17.6 Exporting Languages
Languages can be exported to a text file for e.g. translation.
1. Select Export from the Import/Export button.
2. Specify format, location, delimiter (for text file format) and language
selection, and click OK.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
313
Language Management
Parameter
Description
Format
Select format of the exported file; text file or Excel file.
Path
Browse to the location for the exported file
Delimiter
If Text file format was selected, select delimiter from the
drop-down list; comma, semicolon, space or tab
Languages
Select which languages to export
The exported file will also include the default language.
Note:
To display certain characters (such as Chinese or Arabic) correctly in Excel select
Unicode (UTF-8) in the Excel import dialog.
Note:
In order to import or export .xls-files Microsoft Excel must be installed.
17.7 Importing Languages
After translation or other editing, the updated language file can be imported to
the project again.
1. Select Import from the Import/Export button.
2. Specify location and language selection, and click OK.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
314
Language Management
Parameter
Description
Format
Select format of the file to import; text file or Excel file.
Path
Browse to the location of the file to import
Languages
Select which languages to import
Import Strategy
Selecting Key performs the import according to the
Designer and Object columns in the multiple languages
configuration page. Reference Text performs the import
according to the Text column. If you have changed
the texts of the default language after exporting the
languages, it is recommended to select Key.
The imported file will also include the default language.
Note:
Make sure to make a backup copy of the project before importing languages, in case
there are mismatches between the existing and the imported languages.
Note:
In order to import or export .xls-files Microsoft Excel must be installed.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
315
Audit Trail
18
Audit Trail
The Audit Trail function makes it possible to track operator actions.
The Audit Trail database can be exported in csv format using the Database Export
action. It is recommended to use the database export method rather than the
backup method.
Related information
Database Export
18.1 Logging Strategies
To meet FDA (Food and Drug Administration) demands, it is possible to log
actions in a strict manner. FDA logging implies that no log entries will ever
be overwritten. If the size of the audit trail database is close to being exceeded
(approximately 80% of the limit), a notification window will be displayed, where
the user is warned, and demanded to export the data. Alternatively, the size of
the Audit Trail database can be increased. If the limit of the database is exceeded,
the logging is terminated and the operator panel will be blocked for any further
operator actions. This is indicated by an error message.
With circular buffering, the oldest log entry is overwritten when the database is
full. No warning message is displayed when reaching the limit of the database.
The database can be exported using an action, regardless of logging strategy.
The log entries are saved in the Audit Trail database, and the information can be
displayed using the Audit Trail Viewer.
18.2 Using the Audit Trail Function
The function is enabled by selecting Audit Trail from the Insert ribbon tab. The
configuration page opens in the desktop area. All actions available for logging
are listed. It is possible to log all or only some actions. It is also possible to log tag
changes only (without logging actions).
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
316
Audit Trail
Parameter
Description
Log All/Log None
Click the buttons to quickly select all or no actions from
the list
Logging strategy
Select FDA or Cyclic Buffering
Max size of database
The maximum size of the Audit Trail database
Value change on tags, performed by user actions, can be logged by selecting Log to
Audit Trail in the tags configuration page. This option is enabled only if the audit
trail function is activated in the project.
Related information
Others in Adding Tags section
18.2.1
Audit Trail Description
It is possible to add a description for each object that is logged to the Audit Trail
database using the Property Grid.
The description will be saved to the Description column of the Audit Trail
database, and is limited to 255 characters.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
317
Audit Trail
18.3 Audit Trail Viewer
The Audit Trail Viewer is selected from the Objects group on the Home ribbon
tab. It displays the information from the Audit Trail database.
Selecting Configure Columns on the General tab when the Audit Trail Viewer
object is selected makes it possible to choose and configure columns to display in
runtime.
18.4 Audit Trail Export
An audit trail database can be exported as a .csv file and saved to a USB stick,
an external memory card or to the project files folder. The export is configured
through the Database Export action available from the Database action group.
Note:
The export will not delete the audit trail log from the project.
Related information
Action Groups
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
318
Audit Trail
18.4.1
Audit Trail Export from an iX panel
Target
It is possible to select export to USB, export to external memory card or export to
the Project Files folder, and also setting another name of the export file.
It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or
semicolon).
18.4.2
Audit Trail Export from a PC Target
It is possible to select Browse and Select an export path, Export to Path or the
Export to Project Files folder, and also setting another name of the export file.
The Browse and Select an export path option allows browsing for desired export
destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are
unknown when designing the project.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
319
Audit Trail
Select the Export to Path option when you want to set the path when designing the
project. If the pre-defined path is not valid in runtime, the operator may browse
the PC environment by clicking a browse button.
It is also possible to select the requested delimiter in the .csv file (comma or
semicolon).
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
320
Text Library
19
Text Library
With the text library function, text tables can be created, where values are linked
to texts. The text library function can be used for presentation of each sequence
step in sequence control. Another possible application is to present error codes,
where an analog signal generates error codes connected to texts in a text library.
The function can also be used to give analog values specific values, depending on
the selected texts.
The text library function is activated by selecting it from the Insert ribbon tab.
Texts and groups can be added from the Add button.
It is also possible to add start and end values for each message, that makes the text
in the connected object change depending on the value of the tag.
Note:
The Start Value and End Value can only be given as integers. This could result in
problems updating the text when the input value is entered with decimals, especially if
the input value jumps in and out of the given range. If this is the case, use the Configure
Text function instead. This is available under the General tab when the object is
selected.
Note:
A default text that has been entered in Configure Text will not be presented outside
a range that has been defined in the Text Library. In this case, use Configure Text to
define all text presentations for the object.
Related information
HMI Controls
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
321
Text Library
19.1 Connecting Objects to Text Library
Texts
Perform the following steps to connect an object to a text library text:
1. Select the object on the screen.
2. Click on General on the Dynamics tab.
3. Select the Text property, and select Text Library Group Converter.
4. Browse to the tag and select the text library group.
The object will now present the texts from the text library instead of the value.
19.2 Exporting and Importing Text
Library Texts
The texts in the text library can be exported and imported using the
Import/Export button in the Text library configuration page. The procedure is
similar to exporting and importing tags.
Related information
Importing and Exporting Tags
Tag Import Example
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
322
Database Export
20
Database Export
Some databases in the project can be exported as a .csv file to a USB stick, an
external memory card or to the project files folder. The following databases are
available for csv export: alarm server, audit trail, data logger and trend viewer.
Database export is not supported during project simulation.
Tip:
To display certain characters (such as Chinese or Arabic) correctly in Excel, import the
csv file as text, and set the file origin to Unicode (UTF-8).
20.1 Setting up Database Export
The export is triggered via an action, Database Export, in the Database group.
Individual database tables may be selected for export by clicking the + sign.
The default properties for the database export is exporting the database to the
project files folder with the name as given in the project.
Note:
To facilitate exporting multiple databases at once, configuring multiple actions is
recommended.
Clicking the ... button next to the selected database opens a dialog from which the
default database export properties may be altered.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
323
Database Export
20.1.1
Database Export from operator
panel Target
It is possible to select export to USB stick or external memory card, and also setting
another name of the export file. Leaving the Overwrite box unchecked adds date
and time to the export file name, thus avoiding overwriting an existing export file.
Note:
When exporting from a CE target (iX TxA or iX TxB operator panel) note that the options
External Memory Card and USB are not available on a PC. If the Target Type in the
project is changed from a CE target to a PC the selection is cleared and has to be made
again.
20.1.2
Database Export from PC Target
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
324
Database Export
It is possible to set another name of the export file. Leaving the Overwrite box
unchecked adds date and time to the export file name, thus avoiding overwriting
an existing export file.
The Browse and Select an Export Path option allows browsing for desired export
destination in runtime. This may be useful if available folders in runtime are
unknown when designing the project.
Select the Export to Path option when you want to set the path when designing the
project. If the pre-defined path is not valid in runtime, the operator may browse
the PC environment by clicking a browse button.
Note:
When exporting from PC to a CE target (iX TxA or iX TxB operator panel) it is not possible
to use paths to an External Memory Card or a USB. If the Target Type in the project is
changed from a PC to a CE target the selection is cleared and has to be made again.
Related information
Actions Ribbon Tab
Simulate
Multiple Actions
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
325
iX panel System Software
21
iX panel System Software
In the operator panel, iX Runtime comes pre-loaded on delivery.
iX Runtime can be replaced, that is, updated to a newer version, either via PC or
via external memory card.
An Image Loader is used to download system programs to the operator panel via a
PC. The Image Loader is available from the web site.
Note:
The Image Loader requires that .NET Framework 2.0 is installed on the PC.
Note:
When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not
interrupted during the transfer.
It is not recommended to downgrade the system software to a previous version.
21.1 Welcome Screen
When the operator panel is started, the welcome screen is displayed. The
following items about the operator panel are listed:
•
Size of internal memory card, if applicable
•
IP address
•
Image version
If there is a project in the panel, it will be loaded automatically.
If there is no project in the panel, touching the screen will display the Service
menu.
If there is an SD card inserted into the panel, and the project on the SD card differs
from what is saved in the operator panel, then the user is asked if the project and
IP-settings should be restored.
Related information
Service Menu
21.2 Service Menu
The service menu for the operator panel can be accessed before a project is
downloaded.
21.2.1
Service Menu in an Empty Panel
When no project is loaded in the panel memory, the panel will boot, displaying the
Welcome screen.
• Press anywhere on the panel display to enter the service menu.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
326
iX panel System Software
21.2.2
Service Menu in iX TxA/iX TxB
Panels
Perform the following steps to enter the service menu:
1. Apply power to the panel.
2. When the hourglass appears, press a finger on the screen and hold for
approximately 20 seconds.
3. If the service menu is password protected, you will be prompted for a pin code.
Enter pin code.
4. The touch calibration screen will display the following message:
“Tap anywhere on screen or touch calibrate will start in 10 seconds.”
5. Press finger once again to enter the service menu.
21.2.3
Service Menu Options
IP Settings
Select to obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP, or specify an IP address.
The IP address can also be set during project transfer.
For panels with two Ethernet ports, select port according to the illustration below.
The port that is currently connected is recognized by a *.
Date/Time
Use the Date/Time Settings dialog to set the time zone, date and time for the
panel.
Erase Project
The erase function will detect if the project is located in the panel memory or on a
memory card. Pressing Erase Project will completely remove the project and all its
components from the panel memory/the memory card.
Copy Project
Selecting Copy Project will copy a project from a connected memory card to the
panel memory.
If there is already a stored project in the target panel, the copy command will result
in a dialog asking if a backup of the existing project should be saved on the memory
card.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
327
iX panel System Software
If IP settings are stored in the memory card, a dialog will appear, asking if the IP
settings should be applied to the target panel. It is necessary to reboot the panel for
the IP address to be updated.
The copy function can also be used to copy a project from a USB memory,
however without the possibility to transfer IP settings.
Touch Calibrate
Select Touch Calibrate if the touch screen needs to be calibrated. Follow the
instructions on the screen to perform a calibration.
Close
Press Close to exit the service menu.
21.3 iX panel Upgrade
The operator panel can be upgraded using the Image Loader application.
21.3.1
Requirements
Updating of the operator panel system program requires the following:
•
A PC with Image Loader application.
•
An Ethernet connection between the PC and the operator panel.
•
The operator panel IP address.
•
The Image file from the web site.
21.3.2
Transfer Image
1. Double-click on the executable Image Loader file to start the transfer program.
2. Follow the instructions.
Transfer procedure in iX TxA panels
The image transfer procedure is completely menu-driven. The operator panel
will be ready for transfer directly afterwards, provided that all steps are performed
and completed.
The following steps outline the transfer procedure:
1. Disconnect the power supply from the panel.
2. Press a finger on the screen and apply power
3. Start the Image loader software on the computer, and follow the instructions
on screen.
4. Select the operator panel to upgrade by entering its IP address.
5. Click Upgrade.
6. When the upgrade is finished, disconnect power from the operator panel.
7. Reconnect power to the operator panel.
8. Once the system files have been updated, a project can be downloaded to the
operator panel.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
328
iX panel System Software
Note:
When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not
interrupted during the transfer.
Transfer procedure in iX TxB panels
The image transfer procedure is completely menu-driven. The operator panel
will be ready for transfer directly afterwards, provided that all steps are performed
and completed.
The iX TxB panels can be updated either by using a USB flash drive, or using the
Ethernet connection to transfer the files.
Transfer procedure using a USB flash drive
1. Start the Image loader software on the computer.
2. Plug an empty USB flash drive into the computer running the Image loader
software.
3. Select the USB flash drive in the Image loader software.
4. Click Create.
5. Disconnect power from the operator panel
6. Plug the USB flash drive into the operator panel.
7. Reconnect power to the operator panel.
8. Once the system files have been updated, any existing project in the panel will
be started.
Note:
When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not
interrupted during the transfer.
Transfer procedure using the Ethernet connection
1. Start the Image loader software on the computer.
2. Select the operator panel to upgrade by entering its IP address.
3. Click Update. Any project running in the panel will be stopped, and the
update sequence will begin.
4. When the upgrade is finished, disconnect power from the operator panel.
5. Reconnect power to the operator panel.
6. Once the system files have been updated, any existing project in the panel will
be started.
Note:
When updating an operator panel, it is important to ensure that power is not
interrupted during the transfer.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
329
Multiple Controllers
22
Multiple Controllers
It is possible to use multiple drivers with one operator panel. This means that the
operator panel can communicate with different controllers simultaneously. The
controllers can be connected to the serial ports on the operator panel and via the
Ethernet port.
Note:
If the same tag is connected to addresses in more than one active controller, there is no
way to control from which controller the value is read in runtime.
22.1 Adding a Controller
Click on Tags in the Project Explorer, select the Controller tab and click Add to
add a new controller in the current project, and select which controller model and
driver that is to be used.
Tags are added and controller is selected on the Tags tab.
Related information
Adding a Controller
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
330
Multiple Controllers
22.1.1
Addressing
Addressing of the tags in the controllers is carried out according to the help file
for each driver.
When assigning a tag to an object, all tags, regardless of controller connection, are
available for selection.
22.1.2
Examples
The following examples show configurations where multiple drivers are used in
the operator panel.
The operator panel communicating with one controller and one frequency converter.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
331
Multiple Controllers
The operator panel communicating in series with one controller via Ethernet and with
controllers of another make.
The operator panel communicating with two controllers of different makes via
Ethernet.
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
332
Troubleshooting
23
Troubleshooting
This section describes tools to use in case of unexpected behavior in iX Developer.
23.1 Project Build Failure
If project build fails, check that the absolute path to the project, including its
components, does not exceed 260 characters.
23.2 Backup Project Issues
Make sure that project that is fetched using the Backup command is identical to
the current iX Developer project; i.e. has the same name and is of the same size.
Related information
Upload Database
23.3 Invalid Names
If using system device names when naming objects such as controllers, screens,
recipe managers, data loggers and script modules, an error message will be
displayed, stating that this is an invalid name. Examples of system device names:
AUX, COM1, CON, LPT3, NUL, PRN.
Related information
Name Group
23.4 Adobe Reader not Recognized
In order for the PDF Viewer object to recognize that Adobe Reader is installed in
the development PC as well as in the target, the setting Display PDF in browser
has to be enabled in Adobe Reader.
1. Open Adobe Reader and select Edit/Preferences/Internet.
2. Check the Display PDF in browser box.
23.5 Expression Cannot Be Found
If an error indicating that an expression cannot be found is generated at project
validation, make sure that objects inserted from the Component library uses
global expressions only.
Related information
Using Expressions
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
333
Troubleshooting
23.6 Performance Issue Related to
Graphics Card
When designing iX Developer projects, the CPU load may suddenly increase
when performing actions such as moving objects on the screen or hovering over
buttons, depending on which graphics card is used.
This problem may be solved by adjusting the hardware acceleration of the graphics
card.
In Windows XP, follow the steps below to make needed adjustments:
1. Double-click on the Display icon in the Windows control panel.
2. Select the Settings tab and click on the Advanced button.
3. Select the Troubleshoot tab and decrease or turn off the hardware acceleration
by dragging the slider.
Note:
Should you experience problems with the graphic rendering, make sure the latest
graphical driver is used. If the latest graphical driver is used and rendering issues still
occur, upgrade to a better graphics card.
Related information
System Requirements and Limitations
23.7 Error Related to Third Party
Controls
When opening a project including third party controls, the third party controls
have to be included in the iX Developer third party control folder. Otherwise the
project may terminate, or unexpected error messages may be displayed.
When referencing third-party assemblies (.dll files), make sure not to place two
files with the same fully qualified assembly name in the same folder, otherwise
errors may occur.
23.8 Performance Issue When
Navigating in Script Tree View
If you are working with a large iX Developer project, especially a project with
many tags and alarms, you may find that navigating the script tree view is slow.
The performance can be improved by saving the project.
Related information
Script
Beijer Electronics, MAEN831L
334

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project